Accent (2009) - Car HYUNDAI - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Accent (2009) HYUNDAI

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE. These titles indicate the following:

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY

Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected, generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.

You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaius.com website at: https://www.hyundaius.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx

If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer Connect Center at:

Hyundai Customer Care

P.O. Box 20850

Fountain Valley, CA 92728

800-633-5151

[e-mail]

Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday, between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST (English).

For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who drive HYUNDAIs. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner's Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.

This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's controls and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.

This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

CAUTION

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2020 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI Motor America.

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine Parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the same parts used by HYUNDAI Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability for our customers.

Genuine Parts

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Damage caused by using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other HYUNDAI warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasing HYUNDAI Genuine Parts?

Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below).

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported to the U.S. are packaged with labels written only in English.

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized HYUNDAI Dealerships.

Genuine HYUNDAI | Parts 28511-33361 MANIFOLD EXHAUST 1 PC LK MADE IN KOREA

Galactica Papta Galactica Papta

Gen Parts Hyundai | Genuine Parts UNIQI | Genuine Parts Hyundai | Genuine Parts Hyundai | Genuine Parts UNIQI | Genuine Parts

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. To gain an overview of the contents of your Owner's Manual, use the Table of Contents in the front of the manual. The first page of each Chapter includes a detailed Table of Contents of the topics in that Chapter.

To quickly locate information about your vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in this manual and the page number where it can be found.

For your convenience, we have incorporated tabs on the right-hand page edges. These tabs are coded with the Chapter titles to assist you with navigating through the manual.

SAFETY MESSAGES

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety. Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine and engine components, never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified.

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for additional information.

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Gasoline containing alcohol or methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline. For example, "E15" is a gasohol comprised of 15% ethanol and 85% gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 15% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of "E85" may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 15 percent.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system:

• Never use gasohol which contains methanol.
• Never use gasohol containing more than 15% ethanol.
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
• Never use "E85" fuel.

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use of "E85" fuel.

Using Fuel Additives (except Detergent Fuel Additives)

Using fuel additives such as:

• Silicone fuel additive
• Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
• Other metallic-based fuel additives may result in cylinder misfire, poor acceleration, engine stalling, damage to the catalyst, or abnormal corrosion, and may cause damage to the engine resulting in a reduction in the overall life of the powertrain.

- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may illuminate.

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels or fuel additives may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

HYUNDAI does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emission control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the cluster may come on.

Detergent Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com).

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS

For customers who do not use TOP Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, detergent-based fuel additives that you can purchase separately may be added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank according to the maintenance schedule is recommended (refer to the Maintenance Schedule in chapter 7).

Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

• This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
  In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehicles or emitted from them are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or reproductive harm. These include:

• Gasoline and its vapors
- Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
- Interior passenger compartment components and materials
- Component parts which are subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds and other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
- Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
- How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
- How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Safety System of Your Vehicle

Convenient Features of Your Vehicle

Infotainment System

Driving Your Vehicle

What to Do in an Emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

Index

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior Overview....1-2

Interior Overview 1-4

Instrument Panel Overview 1-5

Engine Compartment 1-6

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

Front view

Technical diagram of a silver sedan with numbered parts for identification

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood 3-42
2. Headlamp....3-87, 7-61
3. Fog lamp 3-88, 7-61
4. Tires and wheels 7-31
5. Side View Mirrors 3-29
6. Sunroof 3-37
7. Front windshield wiper blades..3-92, 7-26
8. Windows 3-33

OHCA017001

■Rear view

Technical diagram of a silver sedan with numbered parts labeled for identification and assembly reference.

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Antenna 4-2
2. Doors 3-12
3. Fuel filler door....3-49
4. Rear combination lamp 7-67
5. High mounted stop lamp 7-70
6. Rear view monitor 3-94
7. Trunk....3-43

OHCA017002

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

Interior view of a car with numbered diagnostic panel and control buttons, highlighting the dashboard and seat area.

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Door lock/unlock button ....3-12
2. Side view mirror control switch.....3-31
3. Central door lock switch 3-14
4. Power window lock switch*......3-36
5. Power window switches* ....3-33
6. Light control/Turn signals .....3-85
7. Wiper/Washer 3-92
8. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....3-53
9. ESC OFF button....5-28
10. Hood release lever 3-42
11. Fuel filler door opener ....3-49
12. Trunk release lever 3-44
13. Fuse box....7-47
14. Steering wheel 3-18
15. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ..3-19
16. Seat 2-3

OHCA017003

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and three close-up views of the dashboard and gear shift.

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Steering wheel audio controls/Bluetooth® wireless technology hands-free controls....4-3
2. Instrument cluster....3-52
3. Horn....3-20
4. Driver's front air bag 2-41
5. Engine Start/Stop button 5-8
6. Key ignition switch 5-5
7. Manual transmission....5-15
8. Intelligent variable transmission .....5-18
9. Manual climate control/Automatic climate control system ....3-95, 3-104
10. Passenger's front air bag.....2-41
11. Glove box 3-121

OHCA017004

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Smartstream G1.6

Interior view of a car's hood with numbered components (no visible text or symbols)

1. Engine oil filler cap 7-16
2. Engine oil dipstick....7-16
3. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir....7-21
4. Battery 7-28
5. Fuse box 7-48
6. Air cleaner....7-23
7. Engine coolant reservoir....7-18
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-22
9. Radiator cap 7-18

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OHCA079001

Safety system of your vehicle

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work. Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

Important safety precautions....2-2

Always Wear Your Seat Belt 2-2

Restrain All Children....2-2

Air Bag Hazards....2-2

Driver Distraction 2-2

Control Your Speed....2-2

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition....2-2

Seats 2-3

Safety Precautions 2-4

Front Seats 2-5

Rear Seats....2-8

Head Restraints 2-11

Seat Warmers....2-14

Seat belts 2-16

Seat Belt Safety Precautions....2-16

Seat Belt Warning Light 2-17

Seat Belt Restraint System....2-18

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions....2-24

Care of Seat Belts....2-27

Child restraint system (CRS) 2-28

Children Always in the Rear....2-28

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ......2-29

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)....2-31

Air bag

- Advanced supplemental restraint system.....2-39

Where Are the Air Bags?......2-41

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?......2-44

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates....2-49

Occupant Classification System (OCS)......2-50

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? .....2-55

SRS Care....2-60

Additional Safety Precautions 2-61

Air Bag Warning Labels 2-61

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags, ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain All Children

All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate child restraint. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.

Air Bag Hazards

While air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and shorter adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Driver Distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones.

Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction or getting into an accident:

- ALWAYS set up your mobile devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and when conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email while driving. Most states have laws prohibiting drivers from texting. Some states and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.

Control Your Speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

SEATS

Technical diagram of a car interior with numbered components and labeled parts in Chinese

Front seat

1. Forward and backward
2. Seatback angle
3. Seat cushion height (Driver's seat)
4. Headrest
5. Seat warmer *

Rear seat

1. Seatback folding*

2. Headrest*

*: if equipped

OHCA037037

Safety Precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety together with the seat belts and air bags in an accident.

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and their chest.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

- Adjust the driver's seat as far to the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.

- Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or anyone between the steering wheel and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimize the risk of leg injuries.

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before driving the vehicle.

At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained. Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate child restraint systems. Adults and children who have outgrown a booster seat must be restrained using the seat belts.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small infants to ride on a passenger's lap.
- Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.
- Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.

Front Seats

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position and proper locking of the seat-back.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• Use extreme caution when picking up small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.

CAUTION

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while wearing your seat belt. Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

Manual adjustment

The front seat can be adjusted by using the levers located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

Car seat assembly diagram showing left and right views of a car seat with highlighted seat design (no text or symbols)

Forward and rearward adjustment To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

3D illustration of a car seat with highlighted blue cable fastening mechanism (no text or symbols)

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger's hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

Diagram illustrating car seatbelt usage with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

Seat cushion height (For driver's side)

To change the height of the seat cushion:

• Push down on the lever several times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times, to raise the seat cushion.

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing a curved panel with an arrow pointing to a slot, no visible text or symbols.

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger's seatback.

WARNING

To prevent the Occupant Classification System from malfunctioning:

Do not hang onto the front pas-senger's seatback.

CAUTION

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.

Rear Seats

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard, with a close-up inset highlighting a component labeled OHCR036003 (no text or symbols on main subject)

1. Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position by pushing and holding the release button (1) and pushing down on the headrest (2).

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and door, with arrows indicating movement or features (no text or symbols visible)

1. Move the seatbelt toward the outboard position before folding down the seatback to avoid the seatbelt system interfering with the seatback.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and dashboard compartment with a blue control knob (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull up the seatback folding lever (1), then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle.

Interior view of a car showing the rearrest door, dashboard, and seat area (no visible text or symbols)

1. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold the seatback to the upright position. Push the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

WARNING

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a collision causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

Make sure the vehicle is off, the shift lever is in P (Park), and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

! CAUTION

• Be careful when loading cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through the rear passenger seats, ensure the cargo is properly secured to prevent it from moving while driving.
• Unsecured cargo in the passenger compartment can cause damage to the vehicle or injury to it's occupants.

Head Restraints

The vehicle's front and rear seats have adjustable head restraints. The head restraints provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your head restraints:

• Always properly adjust the head restraints for all passengers BEFORE starting the vehicle.
- NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the head restraints removed or reversed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Silhouette of a human head and neck with a highlighted anatomical structure, marked with alignment lines (no text or symbols)

Adjust the head restraints so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

• NEVER adjust the head restraint position of the driver's seat when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as close to the passenger's head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.
• Make sure the head restraint locks into position after adjusting it.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the head restraints.

CAUTION

When there is no occupant in the rear seats, adjust the height of the headrest to the lowest position. The rear seat headrest can reduce the visibility of the rear area.

Front seat head restraints

Top-down schematic of a car showing internal compartments and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

The vehicle's front and passenger's seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints for the passengers safety and comfort.

1 2 3 OHCA037061

Adjusting the height up and down To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button (2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

Diagram of a car interior with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

2 3 4 1 4 3 2 OHCA037062 OHCA037063

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward using the seatback angle lever (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release button (3) while pulling the head restraint up (4).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
3. Adjust the seatback (4) forward using the seatback angle lever (3).

Rear seat head restraints

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing interior seating and structural elements (no text or symbols)

*: if equipped
OHCA037060

The rear seats are equipped with head restraints in all the seating positions for the passenger's safety and comfort.

① ③ ② OHCR036006

Adjusting the height up and down To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button (2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

① ② ③ CA037052

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.
2. Press the head restraint release button (1) while pulling the head restraint up (2).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles into the holes (3) while pressing the release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Seat Warmers (if equipped)

Seat warmers are provided to warm the seats during cold weather.

WARNING

The seat warmers can cause a SERIOUS BURN, even at low temperatures and especially if used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the skin should use extreme caution, especially the following types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
- Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness.

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the seat that insulates against heat when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat cushion. This may cause the seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat warmers and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a highlighted control panel (no text or symbols visible)

While the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

• Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

i Information

With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

SEAT BELTS

This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things to avoid when using seat belts.

Seat Belt Safety Precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags are designed to supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most states require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts:

• ALWAYS properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear seats.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• NEVER allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupant's lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.
• Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.
• Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.
  • Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use a seat belt if the webbing or hardware is damaged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.
• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

WARNING

Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing
  • Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent

Seat Belt Warning Light

Seat belt warning light (for driver's seat)

OLMB033022

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you place the ignition switch to the ON position regardless of belt fastening. However, if the seat belt is unfasted, a warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

Seat Belt Restraint System

Illustration of a person using a bandpass to cut the spine (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:

- Position the lap portion of the seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Position one arm under the shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illustration.
  • Always position the shoulder belt anchor into the locked position at the appropriate height.
• Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor

1 2 OLMB033087

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

2 1 ODH033053

You should place the lap belt (1) portion across your hips and the shoulder belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you.

If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

Verify the shoulder belt anchor is locked into position at the appropriate height. Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident.

NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the three different positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

OYC036014

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

Medical procedure image showing hands adjusting a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-point system with convertible locking retractor

This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Convertible retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a convertible retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, NEVER place any infant/child restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly across your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint System" section in this chapter.

NOTICE

Although the seat belt retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, the emergency locking mode allows seated passengers to move freely in their seat while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

To deactivate the automatic locking mode, unbuckle the seat belt and allow the belt to fully retract.

Medical procedure image showing hands adjusting a medical buckle with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Rear center seat belt

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle assembly (no text or symbols visible)

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.

Pre-tensioner seat belt (Driver and front passenger)

1 2 OTL035053

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's Pre-tensioner Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner and Emergency Fastening Device System). The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal or side collision(s). The Emergency Fastening Device System may be activated in certain crashes where the frontal or side collision(s) is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal or side collision(s), the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

(2) Emergency Fastening Device System

The purpose of the Emergency Fastening Device System is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

WARNING

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.
- Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
- Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an accident.
- NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioners become hot and can burn you.

OLMB033040/Q

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration above:

1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency Fastening Device System

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS air bags as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions or rollovers.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be inhaled for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

WARNING

• Fasten your seat belt while sitting properly in an upright position to maximize the effectiveness of the pre-tensioner seat belt system.
• A pre-tensioner seat belt system is designed to activate only once. Replace the pre-tensioner seat belt system, if it was activated in an accident.

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt.

Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt line so that it fits snugly and as low as possible across the hips, not across the abdomen.

WARNING

- A pregnant woman or a patient is more vulnerable to any impact on the abdomen during an abrupt stop or accident. If you are in an accident while pregnant, we recommend you consult your doctor.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat. For more information refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a child restraint appropriate for the child's height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving. The violent forces created during an accident will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to the "Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat must always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system and/or seat belts in the rear seat. Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint.

If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Always make sure children are wearing their seat belts and that they are properly adjusted before driving.
- NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the child's neck or face.
- Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.

Transporting an injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. Consult a physician for specific recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front or rear seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING

• NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Care of Seat Belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)

Children Always in the Rear

WARNING

Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat. A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Even with air bags, children can be seriously injured or killed. Children too large for a child restraint must use the seat belts provided.

All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices. The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling.

Child restraint systems must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213).

Child restraint systems are generally designed to be secured in a vehicle seat by lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Child restraint system (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the rear seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

WARNING

An improperly secured child restraint can increase the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH in an accident. Always take the following precautions when using a child restraint system:

• NEVER install a child or infant restraint in the front passenger's seat.
  • Always properly secure the child restraint to a rear seat of the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your child in the child restraint.
- If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child restraint system manual), the head restraint of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.
- Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a HYUNDAI dealer check the child restraint system, seat belts, tether anchors and lower anchors.

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS)

When selecting a CRS for your child, always:

• Make sure the CRS has a label certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on your child's height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this information.
• Select a child restraint that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation and use provided with the child restraint system.

Child restraint system types

There are three main types of child restraint systems: rear-facing seats, forward-facing seats, and booster seats. They are classified according to the child's age, height and weight.

Rear-facing child seats

WARNING

NEVER install a child or infant restraint in the front passenger's seat.

Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.

Interior view of a car showing a patterned seatbelt and seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols visible)

A rear-facing child seat provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the seat and reduce the stress to the neck and spinal cord.

All children under age one must always ride in a rear-facing infant child restraint.

Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typically have higher height and weight limits for the rear-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rear-facing for a longer period of time.

Continue to use a rear-facing child seat for as long as your child will fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the child seat manufacturer. It's the best way to keep them safe. Once your child has outgrown the rear-facing child restraint, your child is ready for a forward-facing child restraint with a harness.

Interior view of a car showing a person in a seatbelt, no visible text or symbols

Forward-facing child restraints

A forward-facing child seat provides restraint for the child's body with a harness. Keep children in a forward-facing child seat with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your child restraint's manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forward-facing child restraint, your child is ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is a restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the lap of your child.

Keep your child in a booster seat until they are big enough to sit in the seat without a booster and still have the seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie snugly across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie snug across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)

WARNING

Before installing your child restraint system always:

• Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instructions regarding child restraint systems in this manual.

Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual, the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

After selecting a proper child seat for your child, check to make sure it fits properly in your vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child seat. Note these general steps when installing the seat to your vehicle:

• Properly secure the child restraint to the vehicle. All child restraints must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH system. If using the lap/shoulder belt for your child restraint, the convertible locking retractor should be pulled all the way out to engage the "automatic locking" mode. (See page 2-36.)
• Make sure the child restraint is firmly secured. After installing a child restraint to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A child restraint secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-to-side movement can be expected.

- Secure the child in the child restraint. Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child restraint according to the manufacturer instructions.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH System)

The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to make installation of the child restraint easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your child restraint. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The LATCH system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the child restraint to the rear seats.

Lower anchors are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments.

To use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you must have a child restraint with LATCH attachments.

The child seat manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child seat with its attachments for the LATCH lower anchors.

Top-down view of a car showing interior layout with two directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols present)

OAE036063

LATCH anchors have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There are no LATCH anchors provided for the center rear seating position.

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a child restraint system using LATCH anchors in the rear center seating position. There are no LATCH anchors provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchors can damage the anchors which may break or fail in a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Lower Anchor Position Indicator Lower Anchor OHCA037055

The lower anchor position indicator symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to identify the position of the lower anchors in your vehicle (see arrows in illustration).

The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions.

Securing a child restraint with the LATCH anchors system

To install a LATCH-compatible child restraint in either of the rear outboard seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away from the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child restraint and the lower anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions for properly adjusting and tightening the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the LATCH system:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.
  • Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint.

NOTICE

The recommended weight for the LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg).

How to determine an appropriate child restraint weight:

Child weight + Child restraint weight < 65 lb (30kg)

Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and safety bracket (no text or symbols visible)

First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether strap be attached, attach and tighten the top tether strap to the top tether strap anchor.

Child restraint hook holders are located on the back of the rear seats.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when installing the tether strap:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single tether anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap to anything other than the correct tether anchor. It may not work properly if attached to something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors for adult seat belts or harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Interior view of a car showing a car seat with a belt buckle, no text or symbols visible

To install the tether anchor:

1. Route the child restraint tether strap over the child restraint seatback. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, or route the tether strap over the top of the vehicle seatback. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions to firmly secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is securely attached to the seat by pushing and pulling the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side.

Securing a child restraint with lap/shoulder belt

When not using the LATCH system, all child restraints must be secured to a vehicle rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING

ALWAYS place a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a bandage and handle, no text or symbols present

Automatic locking mode

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking mode), you must manually pull the seat belt all the way out to shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode to secure a child restraint.

The "Automatic Locking" mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

To install a child restraint system on the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on a rear seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the child restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

NOTICE

When using the rear center seat belt, you should also refer to the "Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-point system" section in this chapter.

Illustration of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a hand (no text or symbols)

1. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

i Information

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

Illustration of a car seatbelt with a hand holding a tool, showing a blue arrow indicating left motion (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" (child restraint) mode.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to lift a seatbelt, showing the seatbelt being adjusted (no text or symbols present)

1. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

2. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

3. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.
4. Double check that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or recommends you to use a tether anchor with the lap/shoulder belt, refer to the previous pages for more information.

NOTICE

When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the "Automatic Locking" mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

WARNING

If the retractor is not in the "Automatic Locking" mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored in the car, including manually pulling the seat belt all the way out to shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels indicating different zones or components

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver's front air bag
2. Passenger's front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag

OHCR036010

This vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Air Bag System for the driver's seat and front passenger's seats.

The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision. In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

Where Are the Air Bags?

Driver's and passenger's front air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a Advanced Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the pad covers.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone. The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.

A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, the SRS Control Module (SRSCM) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating front air bags, take the following precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or center console.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.
• No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

Side air bags

Interior view of a car showing the seat, rearview side, and headrest area (no text or symbols visible)

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity.

The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.

The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions:

- Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory seat covers. This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects between the door and the seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.
• Do not put any objects between the side airbag label and seat cushion. It could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not cause impact to the doors when the ignition switch button is in the ON position as this may cause the side air bags to inflate.
  • If the seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Curtain air bags

Interior view of a car showing two views: top is open, bottom is closed with silhouettes inside (no text or symbols visible)

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity.

The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.

The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bag, take the following precautions:

- All seat occupants must wear seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Properly secure child restraints as far away from the door as possible.
- Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.
- Do not hang other objects except clothes, especially hard or breakable objects. In an accident, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.
- Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.
- Do not open or repair the side curtain air bags.

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?

8 2 9 10 11 4 5 3 6 9 10 5 3 4 OAEE036075N

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules/ Side impact sensors
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/Rollover sensor

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side pressure sensors

10. Emergency Fastening Device System

11. Occupant classification system

The SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint System Control Module) continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is in the ON position to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint System) air bag warning light on the instrument panel displays the air bag symbol depicted in the illustration. The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential malfunction with your air bag system, which could include your side and curtain air bags used for rollover protection.

WARNING

If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

• The light does not turn on for approximately six seconds when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
  • The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six seconds.
  • The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
  • The light blinks when the engine is running.

Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the SRS as soon as possible if any of these conditions occur.

During a frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle's deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags.

The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or rollover.

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
  • Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
• Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision, its direction, etc. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.
- The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
- In addition to inflating in certain side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side and curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side and curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

• To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.
  However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to help reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to inflate. NHTSA recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

• NEVER place a child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear seats of the vehicle.
- Adjust the front passenger's and driver's seats as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle.
- Hold the steering wheel with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
- Never place anything or anyone between the air bag and the seat occupant.
- Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

■Driver's front air bag (1)

3D rendered illustration of a person seated in a chair holding a cushion, no text or symbols present

OLMB033054

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

Driver's front air bag (2) showing a seated passenger seat with a pillow, no text or symbols on the diagram itself.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver or the front passenger forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

3D rendered illustration of a driver's front air bag (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

3D illustration of a passenger's front air bag inside a car, showing seatbelt and seat (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

WARNING

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates:

- Do not install or place any objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.

- Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.

WARNING

After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Always wash exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to be used only once.

Noise and smoke from inflating air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF OHCA037056

Your vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System (OCS) in the front passenger's seat.

Main components of the Occupant Classification System

• A detection device located within the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.
- An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
- The instrument panel air bag indicator light is interconnected with the OCS.

The OCS is designed to help detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The purpose is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

For example, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and wearing the seat belt properly, should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on the edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator on the center fascia panel. This system detects the conditions 1-4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated properly and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the air bag and the seat belt.

The OCS may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the classification system. These include:

• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the seatback.
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear or hip protection wear.
• Putting an additional thick cushion on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g. notebook, satellite radio, cell phone) on the seat with inverter charging.

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System

Condition detected by the occupant classification system	Indicator/Warning light Devices
	"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator light	SRS warning light	Front passenger air bag
1. Adult *1	Off Off Activated
2. Infant *2 or child restraint system with 12 months old *3 *4	On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On	Activated

^*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

^*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

*4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

Interior view of a car seat with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

- NEVER put a heavy load in the front seat or seatback pocket, or hang any items on the front passenger seat.

3D rendered illustration of a person seated in a car seat with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

- NEVER ride with the seat-back reclined when the vehicle is moving.

3D illustration of a person seated in a car with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• NEVER place your feet on the front passenger seat-back.

3D illustration of a person seated in a car with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• NEVER place your feet or legs on the dashboard.

3D rendered human figure seated in a car seat with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

- NEVER sit with your hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

Interior view of a car with two people seated, one facing forward and the other on the side, under a blue prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the figures themselves)

- NEVER lean on the door or center console or sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

(continued)

(continued)

Person wearing a blue suit and white pants seated in a chair, with a blue prohibition symbol on the side (no text or symbols on the person or chair)

- Do not sit on the passenger seat wearing heavily padded clothes such as ski wear and hip protector.

Interior view of a car seat with a blue rectangular object on the backrest and a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no readable text or symbols)

• Do not place electronic devices such as laptops, DVD player, cell phone, or conductive materials such as water bottles on the passenger seat.
• Do not use electronic devices such as laptops and satellite radios which use inverter chargers.

- If large quantity of liquid has been spilled on the passenger seat, the air bag warning light may illuminate or malfunction. Therefore, make sure the seat has been completely dried before driving the vehicle.

Blue car seat with a blue stop sign symbol (no text or numbers on the seat body)

- Do not use car seat accessories such as thick blankets and cushions which cover up the car seat surface.

Interior view of a car seat with a blue circular object on the backrest and a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the main subject)

- If large quantity of liquid has been spilled on the passenger seat, the air bag warning light may illuminate or malfunction. Therefore, make sure the seat has been completely dried before driving the vehicle.

• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat. These may damage the occupant detection system, if they puncture the seat cushion.
• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.
• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been developed based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could interfere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.

3D rendered illustration of a person seated in a car seat with a curved roof, no text or symbols present

Proper seated position for OCS If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is on when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

WARNING

Never allow an adult passenger to ride in the front passenger seat when the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Have your passenger reposition himself in the seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions himself properly and the vehicle is restarted, have the passenger move to the rear seat because the air bag will not inflate.

NOTICE

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the OCS will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

Do Not Install a Child Restraint in the Front Passenger's Seat

AIRBAG 1JBH3051

Even though your vehicle is equipped with the OCS, never install a child restraint in the front passenger's seat. An inflating air bag can forcefully strike a child or child restraint resulting in serious or fatal injury.

WARNING

• NEVER place a rear-facing or front-facing child restraint in the front passenger's seat of the vehicle.
  • An inflating frontal air bag could forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injury or death.
  • Always properly restrain children in an appropriate child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision?

Air bags are not designed to inflate in every collision. There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death:

- Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine HYUNDAI parts. This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deployment performance.
• Place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inadvertent air bag deployment.
• Have all air bag repairs conducted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Diagram of a silver sedan with numbered annotations pointing to key components

1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, gear shift, and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

Front view of a white car with visible headlights and grille (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car's interior control panel with a highlighted blue button (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a car's side panel with cloud icons and a highlighted blue square (no text or symbols)

OHCA037012/OHCA037057/OHCR036013/OHCA037058/OHCR036014

Air bag inflation conditions

OLF034050

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the severity of impact of the front collision.

Illustration of two car interior compartments: one with a highlighted vehicle impact, the other showing internal airflow or traffic flow (no text or symbols)

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the driver's and front passenger's air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollover situations, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

OAD035047

In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.

OAD035048

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.

Illustration of two cars with a blue starburst effect, no visible text or symbols

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severity of impact.

Top-down illustration of two cars on a road with a blue explosion effect (no text or symbols)

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

Illustration of a car collision with impact effect, showing a truck and car (no text or symbols on diagram)

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such "underride" collisions.

Illustration of stacked car parts with a printer icon, no text or symbols present

Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment could not provide protection to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision.

Illustration of a silver Tesla car emitting blue electric shock lines near a vertical pipe (no text or symbols)

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, take the following precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or the front passenger's panel above the glove box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.
  • Always have inflated air bags replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of personal injury.

Additional Safety Precautions

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors. Impact to the doors when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate disabilities. If you require modification to your vehicle to accommodate a disability, contact the HYUNDAI Customer Connect Center at 800-633-5151.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

Air Bag Warning Labels

Top-down view of a car dashboard with two blue indicator lights and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing Your Vehicle 3-3

Remote Key....3-3

Smart Key....3-6

Immobilizer System....3-11

Door Locks....3-12

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle....3-12

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle .....3-13

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features....3-16

Child-Protector Rear Door Locks....3-16

Theft-Alarm System....3-17

Steering Wheel....3-18

Electric Power Steering (EPS) 3-18

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering....3-19

Heated steering wheel....3-20

Horn....3-20

Mirrors....3-21

Inside Rearview Mirror 3-21

Side View Mirrors 3-29

Windows 3-33

Power Windows....3-33

Manual windows....3-36

Sunroof....3-37

Sunroof opening and closing....3-38

Sliding the sunroof 3-38

Tilting the sunroof....3-38

Sunshade....3-39

Resetting the sunroof....3-39

Exterior Features....3-42

Hood 3-42

Trunk 3-43

Smart Trunk....3-45

Fuel Filler Door....3-49

Instrument Cluster 3-52

Instrument Cluster Control....3-53

Gauges and Meters 3-54

Transmission shift indicator 3-57

Warning and Indicator Lights....3-58

LCD Display Messages....3-68

LCD Display....3-72

LCD Display Control....3-72

LCD Display Modes....3-72

Trip Computer....3-77

Type A....3-77

Type B....3-81

Lighting....3-85

Exterior Lights 3-85

Interior Lights....3-90

Welcome System 3-91

Wipers and Washers....3-92

Windshield Wipers....3-92

Windshield Washers 3-93

Driver Assist System 3-94

Rear View Monitor....3-94

Manual Climate Control System....3-95

Heating and Air Conditioning 3-96

System Operation 3-100

System Maintenance....3-102

Automatic Climate Control System....3-104

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning....3-105

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning....3-106

System Operation 3-111

System Maintenance....3-113

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging......3-115

Auto Defogging System

(Only for Automatic Climate Control System) .....3-118

Rear Window Defroster 3-119

Storage Compartment 3-120

Center Console Storage 3-120

Sliding Armrest 3-120

Glove Box....3-121

Sunglass Holder....3-121

Multi Box....3-122

Interior Features....3-123

Cup Holder 3-123

Sunvisor....3-124

Power Outlet 3-125

Clock....3-127

Clothes Hanger 3-127

Floor Mat Anchor(s)....3-128

Luggage Net Holder 3-128

ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Key (if equipped)

1 2 3 4 OHCA047001

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and trunk) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Trunk Unlock
4. Panic

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and trunk.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on the remote key.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once if the lock button is pressed again within four seconds.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

i Information

After locking the doors, if you press the Door Lock button again within four seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the horn will sound one time to confirm that the doors are locked.

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2) on the remote key.

2. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Two press unlock setting:

If you press the Door Unlock button on the remote key again within four seconds, then all the doors will unlock.

Two press unlock setting can be changed according to owner's preference in the cluster User Settings mode or with the remote key.

- User settings mode method:

Select or deselect the 'Two Press Unlock' feature in the User Settings mode on the cluster LCD display (User Settings → Door → Two Press Unlock).

- Remote key method:

Press and hold both Door Lock (1) and Door Unlock (2) buttons at the same time until the hazard warning lights blink.

Now all doors will unlock when the Door Unlock button is pressed one time. To change the setting back, repeat this procedure.

i Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press and hold the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the remote key for more than one second.

2. The hazard warning lights will blink two times and the trunk will be unlocked.

Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

i Information

The word "HOLD" is written on the button to inform you that you must press and hold the button for more than one second.

Panic button (if equipped)

Press and hold the Panic button (4) for more than one second. The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 30 seconds.

To cancel the panic mode, press any button on the remote key.

Start-up

For information, refer to the "Key Ignition Switch" section in chapter 5.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the remote key:

- Keep the remote key away from water or any liquid and fire. Internal circuits may malfunction if the inside of the remote key gets damp (from liquids or moisture) or if it is heated. This can exclude the remote key from warranty coverage.

- Avoid dropping or throwing the remote key.

- Protect the remote key from extreme temperatures.

Mechanical key

Close-up of a car key with a blue arrow indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

If the remote key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the driver's door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the mechanical key, press the release button on the remote.

To return the key to its stored position, press the release button and fold the key back into the remote.

Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
  • The remote key battery is weak.

- Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

- The remote key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the remote key.

If the remote key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the remote key contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phone's normal operational signals. This is specifically relevant when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the remote key and your mobile phone in the same location and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

i Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

NOTICE

Keep the remote key away from electromagnetic materials that block electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Diagram of a car key being inserted into a closed door, showing blue adjustment arrows (no text or symbols)

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the cover.
2. Using a screw driver, remove the battery cover.

3. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.

4. Reinstall the battery cover and key cover in the reverse order of removal.

If you suspect your remote key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your remote key is not working correctly contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Smart Key (if equipped)

1 2 3 4 OHCA047003

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and trunk) and start the engine.

1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Trunk Unlock
4. Panic

Locking

Close-up of a car door handle with a blue arrow pointing to the handle area (no text or symbols visible)

To lock :

1. Close all doors, hood and trunk.
2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button (1) on the smart key.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.
4. When the doors are locked, the indicator light on the central door lock/unlock switch will be illuminated.

i Information

The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28\~40 inches (0.7\~1 m) from the outside door handle.

Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle. CR046002
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the Engine Start/Stop button and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

Unlocking

Close-up of a car door handle with a blue arrow pointing to the handle area (no text or symbols visible)

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the driver's outside door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.

3. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Two press unlock setting:

If you press the driver's outside door handle button or Door Unlock button on the smart key again within four seconds, then all the doors will unlock.

Two press unlock setting can be changed according to owner's preference in the cluster User Settings mode or with the smart key.

- User settings mode method:

Select or deselect the 'Two Press Unlock' feature in the User Settings mode on the cluster LCD display (User Settings → Door → Two Press Unlock).

- Smart key method:

Press and hold both Door Lock (1) and Door Unlock (2) buttons at the same time until the hazard warning lights blink. Now all doors will unlock when the Door Unlock button is pressed one time.

To change the setting back, repeat this procedure.

i Information

• The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28\~40 inches (0.7\~1 m) from the outside door handle and other people can also open the doors.
• If you press the front passenger's outside door handle, while carrying the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
  • After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.
• Either the driver or front passenger door can be opened with the door handle button when the smart key is within this range.

Trunk opening

To open:

1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the trunk handle button or press and hold the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

i Information

The trunk handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28 inches (0.7 m) from the trunk handle.

Panic button

Press and hold the Panic button (4) for more than one second. The horn sounds and hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel the panic mode, press any button on the Smart Key.

Start-up

You can start the vehicle without inserting the key.

For information, refer to the "Engine Start/Stop Button" section in chapter 5.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from any liquid or fire. Internal circuits may malfunction if the inside of the smart key gets damp (from liquids or moisture) or if it is heated. This can exclude the smart key from warranty coverage.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.
• Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the driver's door by using the mechanical key.

Two views of a car key being cut, showing internal components and a close-up of the handle (no text or symbols)

Move the release lever in the direction of the arrow (1) and then remove the mechanical key (2). Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two Smart Keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining keys to your authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

Smart key precautions

The smart key may not work if any of the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

If the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phone's normal operational signals. This is specifically relevant when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same location and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

NOTICE

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

NOTICE

Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehicle, the vehicle battery may be discharged.

i Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

Battery replacement

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel with an upward arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Use a slim tool to pry open the rear cover of the smart key.
3. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the rear cover of the smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Immobilizer System (if equipped)

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, the system does not recognize the coding of the key.

Place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position, then place the ignition switch to the ON position again.

The system may not recognize your key's coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e., key chain) is near the key.

The engine may not start because the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally. If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of the key, it is recommended that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential.

NOTICE

The transponder in your key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

i Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

DOOR LOCKS

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle

Mechanical key

■ Remote key ■ Smart key Unlock Lock Unlock Lock OHCA047035

If you lock the driver's door with a mechanical key, all vehicle doors will lock. If you unlock the driver's door with a mechanical key, the driver's door will unlock and the passenger doors will unlock according to the current two press unlock setting.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Remote key

1 2 OHCA047005

To lock the doors, press the Door Lock button (1) on the remote key.

Press the Door Unlock button (2) on the remote key, the driver's door will unlock. If you press the Door Unlock button on the remote key again within four seconds, then all the doors will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Smart key

Lock / Unlock OHCR046002

Door Lock Door Unlock OHCA047006

Press the button on the driver's outside door handle while carrying the Smart Key with you or press the Door Unlock button on the Smart Key, the driver's door will unlock. If you press the button on the front passenger's outside door, all doors will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
- If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.
- Two press unlock setting can be changed in the User Settings mode on the cluster.

i Information

If the electrical power to door lock switch is not operating (ex. dead car battery) and the trunk is closed you will not be able to open the trunk until power is restored.

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door handle

Close-up of a car door handle with numbered components (1, 2, 3), no visible text or symbols beyond labels

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position. The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver's (or front passenger's) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.
• When push the driver's door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position, all vehicle doors will lock. (if equipped)
• When push the driver's door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position, all vehicle doors will unlock. (if equipped)

i Information

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.

With the central door lock/unlock switch (if equipped)

Driver's side 2 OHCR046004

Passenger's side OHCA047699

When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all vehicle doors will lock.

When pressing the (switch (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.

If the key is in the ignition switch and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

WARNING

• The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.
• Do not pull the inner door handle of the driver's or passenger's door while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle. Leaving your vehicle unlocked can allow theft or entry into the vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while depressing the brake, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, engage the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.

CAUTION

Opening a door when something is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a long time while the weather is very hot or cold, there are risks of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when someone is in the vehicle.

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features

Impact sensing door unlock (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked (when set on cluster) when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

All of the doors will be automatically unlocked after the vehicle is turned off. You can activate or deactivate the Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

Child-Protector Rear Door Locks

① ② OHCR046005

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open if the inner door handle is pulled.

To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screw driver) (1) into the hole and turn it to the lock position.

To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.

WARNING

If children accidentally open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occur:

• A door is opened without using the remote key or smart key.
• The trunk is opened without using the remote key or smart key.
• The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the trunk from outside the vehicle with the remote key or smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handle with the smart key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the trunk, or the hood without using the remote key or smart key will cause the alarm to activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if the hood, the trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the hood, the trunk, or the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

i Information

• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the remote key or smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and place the ignition switch in the ON position (for remote key) or start the engine (for smart key) by directly pressing the ignition switch with the smart key.
• If the system is disarmed by unlocking the vehicle, but neither a door or the trunk is opened within 30 seconds, the doors will relock and the system will rearm automatically.

STEERING WHEEL

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the vehicle is turned off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, you may still steer the vehicle, but it will require increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. You may steer the vehicle, but it will require increased steering efforts. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.

i Information

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
  This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.
• When the battery voltage is low, you might have to put more steering effort. However, it is a temporary condition so that it will return to normal condition after charging the battery.
• A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is in the ON or LOCK/OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.
• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperatures, abnormal noise may occur. If the temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

- When an error is detected from the EPS, the steering effort assist function will not be activated in order to prevent fatal accidents. Instrument cluster warning lights may be on or the steering effort may be high. When the following symptoms occur, immediately drive the vehicle to a safe area and check it.

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering (if equipped)

Adjust the steering wheel so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument cluster warning lights and gauges. After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the steering wheel while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and three close-up views of the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

To change the steering wheel angle and height:

1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and distance forward/back (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place.

i Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lock release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

CAUTION

While adjusting the steering wheel height, please do not push or pull it hard since the fixture can be damaged.

Heated steering wheel (For Canada, if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing the left side of the engine compartment with a hand tool interacting with the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the engine is running, press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

i Information

The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

When the engine is turned off during the engine and the heated steering wheel is on, the timer function of heated steering wheel will be reset.

To reuse heated steering wheel, press button again.

NOTICE

Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. This cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.

Horn

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a blue logo on the steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

NOTICE

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

MIRRÓRS

Inside Rearview Mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the center on the view through the rear window.

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area, or behind the rear head-rests which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Night Day OHCA047670

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever towards you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) (For America only, if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlamp of the car behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror. The sensor detects the light level around the vehicle, and automatically adjusts to control the headlamp glare from vehicles behind you.

Whenever the shift lever is placed in R (Reverse), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.

Rearview display Indoor Sensor 1 OTLE045009

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

- Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

- The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

Blue Link® center (For America only, if equipped)

Top-down view of a car interior showing the front and rear dashboard with no visible text or symbols

For details, refer to the Blue Link® Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual or Audio Manual.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink® system, compass and Blue Link® (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System.

During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehicle is pointed. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OAD045045N

(1) Blue Link Center button
(2) Blue Link POI button
(3) Blue Link SOS button
(4) Compass control button & Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button

(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror (if equipped)

The NVS ^® Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light levels in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding NVS® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex website:

www.gentex.com

Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The autodimming function can be controlled by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF button (4):

1. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds again turns the autodimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display (if equipped)

The NVS ^™ Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav ^™ Compass that shows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the ⏻button within 1 second to turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the ⏻button again within 1 second to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the ⏻ button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. To compensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

B520C05NF

To adjust the Zone setting:

1. Determine the desired Zone Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for 6 seconds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat ...13, 14, 15, 1, 2, ...). Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the compass:

1. Press and hold the button for more than 9 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if equipped)

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System can replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the outlined procedures.

Additional HomeLink® information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons be erased for security purposes.

WARNING

Before programming HomeLink® to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

Programming HomeLink®

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be placed in the ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink®.
• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Programming

Flashing ODH044413N

To train most devices, follow these instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press and hold the two outside buttons (☑, ☑), HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel 3, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 10 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 20 seconds.

Flashing ODH044414N

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® and handheld transmitter buttons until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons.

i Information

Some devices may require you to replace this Programming step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" chapter. If the HomeLink® indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com.

1. Press and hold for 5 seconds then release the programmed HomeLink® button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

- If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

- If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Programming" steps 5-7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).

1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button vary by manufacturer). There are 30 seconds to initiate step 7.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.

HomeLink ^® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian programming

During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System button (note steps 2 through 3 in the Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button

To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink® button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with "Programming" step 2.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

Erasing HomeLink® buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased. However, to erase all three programmed buttons:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control System is now in the training (learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming chapters above.

NVS ^ is a registered trademark and Z-Nav ^TM is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. HomeLink ^ is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4

IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

i Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

Side View Mirrors

3D rendering of a car's side mirror and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand side view mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded to help prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

The right side view mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

Use your interior side view mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the side view mirrors while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Blind spot mirror (if equipped)

OLF0444477N OLF0444478N

The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a supplemental mirror that helps reduce the driver's blind spot by showing the rear side area of the vehicle. The blind spot mirror is equipped on the left-hand side view mirror.

WARNING

• Always check the road condition while driving for unexpected situations even though the vehicle is equipped with a blind spot mirror.
- The blind spot mirror is a device made for convenience. Do not solely rely on the mirror but always pay attention to traffic around you.

NOTICE

Do not clean the mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products.

Side view mirror adjustment

Close-up of a car's side mirror and window, showing blue directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Manual type (if equipped)

The side view mirrors are equipped with a remote control for your convenience. It is operated by the control lever in the bottom front corner of the window.

Before driving away, always check that your mirrors are positioned so you can see behind you, both to the left and right sides, as well as directly behind your vehicle. When using the mirror, always exercise caution when attempting to judge the distance of vehicles behind or along side of you.

2 1 OHCR046011

Electric type (if equipped)

1. Press either the L (driver's side) or R (passenger's side) button (1) to select the side view mirror you would like to adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control switch (2) to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button into neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

NOTICE

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, because this can damage the motor.
• Do not attempt to adjust the side view mirrors by hand, because this can damage the motor.

Folding the side view mirrors (if equipped)

Close-up of a car interior showing a blue spray nozzle and airflow direction arrow (no text or symbols)

Manual type (if equipped)

To fold the side view mirrors, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

Close-up of a car control panel with buttons and a highlighted action button (no text or symbols visible)

Electric type (if equipped)

The side view mirrors can be folded or unfolder by pressing the switch.

NOTICE

The electric type side view mirrors operates even though the ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

NOTICE

Do not fold the electric type side view mirrors by hand. It could cause motor failure.

WINDOWS

Power Windows (if equipped)

Technical diagram showing a 3D mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement.

(1) Driver's door power window switch
(2) Front passenger's door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
(7) Power window lock switch

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to be able to raise or lower the windows. Each door has a Power Window switch to control that door's window. The driver has a Power Window Lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows. The power windows will operate for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position. However, if the front doors are opened, the Power Windows will not operate even within the 30 second period.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

6 5 5 6 OHCR046014

To open:

Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.

Auto down window (if equipped)

Pressing the power window switch down momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

The automatic reverse feature doesn't activate while resetting the power window system. Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

Interior view of a car with a teddy bear and blue arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

If a window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 12 inches (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).

If the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reverse feature, the automatic window reverse will not operate.

i Information

The automatic reverse feature is only active when the "Auto Up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.

NOTICE

Do not install any accessories on the windows. The automatic reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

Close-up of a car dashboard with blue keys and control buttons, no visible text or symbols

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passenger's doors by pressing the power window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch is pressed:

• The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.
- The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's power window.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional window operation by a child.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.
- Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

Manual windows (if equipped)

Mechanical joint diagram showing a rotating arm with blue directional arrows (no text or symbols)

To raise or lower the window, turn the window regulator handle clockwise or counterclockwise.

WARNING

When opening or closing the windows, make sure your passenger's arms, hands and body are safely out of the way.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control switch located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

i Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-roof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
  • After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.
  • Make sure heads, other body parts or objects are out of the way before using the sunroof.
• Do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sun-roof while driving, to avoid serious injury.
• Do not leave the engine running and the key in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could operate the sunroof, which could result in serious injury.

- Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause injuries or vehicle damage.

NOTICE

• Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed fully when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is open, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as allow theft.

Sunroof opening and closing

Interior view of a modern airplane cabin showing the ceiling, vent, and side panel with blue directional arrows (no text or symbols)

To open:

Press the sunroof control lever backward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

To close:

Press the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

Sliding the sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever backward or forward momentarily to the second detent position completely opens or closes the sunroof even when the switch is released. To stop the sunroof at the desired position while the sunroof is in operation, press the sunroof control lever backward or forward and release the switch.

i Information

To minimize wind noise while driving, it is recommended that you drive with the sunroof slightly closed (stop the sunroof about 2 inch (5 cm) before the maximum slide open position).

Tilting the sunroof

Exterior view of a white industrial machine with blue airflow indicators (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Tilt the sunroof open:

Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

To close the sunroof:

Push the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

Sunshade

Illustration of a curved electronic device with two blue arrows pointing to its sides, against a cloudy sky background (no text or symbols)

The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof when the glass panel moves. If you want it closed, move the sunshade manually.

NOTICE

The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.

Resetting the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if the following occurs :

• Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected
• The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally operate

Reset procedure :

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON position or start the engine. It is recommended to reset the sun-roof while the engine is running.
2. Push the control lever forward. The sunroof will close completely or tilt depending on the condition of the sunroof.

3. Release the control lever when the sunroof stops moving.

4. Push the control lever forward about 10 seconds.

5. When the sunroof is in the closed position :
   The glass will tilt and slightly move up and down.

6. When the sunroof is in the tilt position:
   The glass will slightly move up and down.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed.

If you release the lever during operation, start the procedure again from step 2.

1. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the control lever forward until the sunroof operates as follows:

Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide Close.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed.

If you release the lever during operation, start the procedure again from step 2.

1. Release the sunroof control lever after all steps have completed. (The sunroof system has been reset.)

i Information

• If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or the sunroof fuse is blown, the sunroof may not operate normally.
• For more detailed information, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Automatic reverse

Illustration of a cartoon bear peeking through a skylight with a blue arrow pointing right (no text or symbols)

If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

WARNING

Small objects that can get caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse system. In this case, the sunroof glass will not detect the object and will not reverse direction.

WARNING

• Make sure heads, other body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the sunroof to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. Objects that are small caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse glass and the glass will not stop and reverse direction.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.
- A sunroof is made of glass, therefore it may break in an accident. If you do not have your seat belt on, you may stick out of the broken glass and get injured or killed. For all passengers safety, have an appropriate protection on (ex. seat belt, child restraint system, etc.).

EXTERIOR FEATURES

Hood

Opening the hood

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

Close-up of a car's front wheel assembly with blue directional arrows indicating components (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car interior panel with a blue cable and connector, no visible text or symbols

1. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push up the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

2. Pull out the support rod and hold the hood open with the support rod (3).

WARNING

• Hold the rubber wrapped portion of the supporting rod only, DO NOT hold the metal portion of the rod.
• The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

2. All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.

3. Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

4. Lower the hood halfway (lifted approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the hood is secure. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not securely locked. Open it again and close it with more force.

Hood open warning (if equipped)

The warning message will appear on the LCD display when hood is open.

The warning chime will operate when the vehicle is being driven at or above 3 km/h with the hood open.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure all obstructions are removed from around the hood opening.
  • Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. Check there is no hood open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. Driving with the hood opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an accident, and the hood could fall or be damaged.

Trunk

Opening the trunk

Exterior view of a white car trunk with a blue logo and an inset showing a blue plastic clip (no text or symbols on the main body)

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).

2. Then do one of the following :

3. Press the button the trunk handle after locking or unlocking the door by remote key or smart key.

4. Press the trunk unlock button of remote key or smart key for more than 1 second.
5. Press the button on the trunk itself with the Smart Key in your possession.

WARNING

The button (1) on the trunk handle is made of the rubber. Do not press it with the sharp objects such as the key, screwdriver or drill.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted car seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

• Use the trunk release lever.
• Lift the trunk lid up.

Closing the trunk

Lower the trunk lid and press down until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again.

WARNING

Always keep the trunk lid completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases containing carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle and serious illness or death may result.

WARNING

Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the Power Trunk. Wait until the trunk is open fully and stopped before loading or unloading cargo from the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the trunk lift torsion bars and the attached hardware, always close the trunk before driving.

i Information

In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WARNING

• NEVER allow anyone to occupy the trunk of the vehicle at any time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, serious injury or death could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather conditions. The trunk is also a highly dangerous location in the event of a crash because it is not a protected occupant space but is a part of the vehicle's crush zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept locked and the Smart Key should be kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks.

Emergency trunk safety release

Exterior view of a car trunk with open lid and internal compartments, shown with an inset close-up of a small component (no text or symbols visible)

Smart Trunk (if equipped)

Illustration of a car with a blue arrow pointing to the front and a person carrying boxes (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Emergency Trunk Safety Release lever located inside the trunk. When someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, the trunk can be opened by moving the lever in the direction of the arrow and pushing the trunk open.

On a vehicle equipped with a smart key, the trunk can be opened using the Smart Trunk system.

How to use the Smart Trunk

The trunk can be opened with no-touch activation satisfying all the conditions below.

• After 15 seconds when all doors are closed and locked
- Positioned in the detecting area for more than 3 seconds.

i Information

• The Smart Trunk does not operate when:
- The smart key is detected within 15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and is continuously detected.
- The smart key is detected within 15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and within 60 inches (1.5 m) from the front door handles. (for vehicles equipped with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.

User Settings Driver Assistant... Door Lights Convenience

Door Auto Lock > Auto Unlock > Two Press Unlo... Smart Trunk

1. Setting

To activate the Smart Trunk, go to User Settings Mode and select Smart Trunk on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

50~100cm OHCR0460210

OHCR046021OHCA047720/O

2. Detect and Alert

If you are positioned in the detecting area (20 \~ 40 inches (50 \~ 100 cm) behind the vehicle) carrying a smart key, the hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound to alert you the smart key has been detected and the trunk will open.

i Information

Do not approach the detecting area if you do not want the trunk to open. If you have unintentionally entered the detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime starts to operate, leave the detecting area with the smart key. The trunk will stay closed.

Illustration of a person carrying a box near a car with wireless signals (no text or symbols)

1. Automatic opening

The hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound 6 times and then the trunk will open.

WARNING

• Make sure you close the trunk before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk do not come out when opening the trunk on a slope. It may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the Smart Trunk when washing your vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk may open inadvertently.
- The key should be kept out of reach of children. Children may inadvertently open the Smart Trunk while playing around the rear area of the vehicle.

How to deactivate the Smart Trunk function using the smart key

1 2 3 OHCA047334

1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Trunk open

If you press any button of the smart key during the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated.

Make sure to be aware of how to deactivate the Smart Trunk function for emergency situations.

i Information

• If you press the door unlock button (2), the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open any door for 30 seconds, the smart trunk function will be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button (3) for more than 1 second, the trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button (1) or trunk open button (3) when the Smart Trunk function is not in the Detect and Alert stage, the smart trunk function will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the Smart Trunk function by pressing the smart key button and opened a door, the smart trunk function can be activated again by closing and locking all doors.

Detecting area

50~100cm OHCR046023

• The Smart Trunk operates with a welcome alert if the smart key is detected within 20\~40 inches (50\~100 cm) from the trunk.
• The alert stops at once if the smart key is positioned outside the detecting area during the Detect and Alert stage.

i Information

• The Smart Trunk function will not work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

• The detecting range may decrease or increase when :

• One side of the tire is raised to replace a tire or to inspect the vehicle.
• The vehicle is parked on a slope or unpaved road, etc.

Fuel Filler Door

Opening the fuel filler door

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted gear shift (no text or symbols visible)

The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling the fuel filler door opener lever.

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Pull the fuel filler door opener lever.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with blue arrows indicating motion, no readable text or symbols present.

1. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully open.
2. To remove the fuel tank cap (2), turn it counterclockwise. You may hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.
3. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

i Information

If the fuel filler door does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

Close-up of a car's front wheel assembly showing internal components and a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is latched securely.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station.
  • Before refueling, note the location of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the potential build-up of static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors and cause a fire.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling. You can generate a build-up of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Once refueling has begun, contact between your bare hand and the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

• Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for intelligent variable transmission) or first gear or R (Reverse, for manual transmission), set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch to the LOCK/ OFF position. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a lighter and do not smoke or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station, especially during refueling.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

i Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel Requirements" suggested in the Introduction chapter.

NOTICE

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■ Type A x1000rpm SPORT C H 6 20 -40 -20 200 180 140 120 100 80 km/h 60 40 20 MPH E F 2 5 ① ② ③ ④ ⑤

■ Type B x1000rpm SPART C H 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 5 ID 3DE 扣 D7 6 2 100 120 140 80 km/h 160 60 40 180- 200- 20 ORANGE SET 220- 10 MPH 140 E F 5 DRANE

1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges and Meters" in this chapter.

OHCA048100/OHCA048101

Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting instrument cluster illumination

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

When the vehicle's position lights or headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster while driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or vehicle damage.

■ Type A ■ Type B

• The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches the maximum or minimum level, a chime will sound.

For information regarding the illumination setting on your audio display, refer to the "Setup" section of your Audio or Navigation manual.

Gauges and Meters Speedometer

MPH OHCI047691

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (MPH) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

Tachometer

Close-up of a analog speedometer face showing dual dials and a pointer (no text or symbols visible)

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

C H OYC046125

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the "H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the Engine Overheats" in chapter 6.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could severely burn. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Fuel gauge

E F OYC046126

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

i Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING

Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the "E (Empty)" level.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

Outside temperature gauge

Type A 70°F Type B 70°F OAD045116N/OTLA045130

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1^ F ( 1^ C).

- Temperature range : -40^ 140^ (-40^ 60^)

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer (to avoid distracting the driver).

You can change the temperature unit from °F to °C or °C to °F in the User Settings mode in the cluster:

• Go to User Settings Mode → Other → Temperature Unit.
• Press TRIP button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds.

For vehicles equipped with Automatic Climate Control, you can also:

- Press and hold the AUTO and OFF buttons on the climate control unit for 3 seconds

Both the temperature unit on the cluster LCD display and climate control screen will change.

Odometer

Type A 10000 mL Type B 10000 mL OAD045119N/OTLE045140

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

Transmission shift indicator Manual transmission shift indicator (if equipped)

Type A Type B ↓4 OAD045185N/OHCR046129

This indicator informs which gear is recommended while driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up: ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down: ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

For example

▲3 : Indicates that shifting up to the 3^rd gear is recommended (currently the shift lever is in the 2^nd or 1^st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3^rd gear is recommended (currently the shift lever is in the 4^th , 5^th , or 6^th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

Intelligent variable transmission(IVT) (if equipped)

Type A Type B OAD045185N/OHCR046128

This indicator displays which shift lever position is selected.

Gear position pop-up (if equipped) The pop-up indicates the current gear position displayed in the cluster for about 2 seconds when shifting into other positions (P/R/N/D).

Warning and Indicator Lights

i Information

Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.

- When there is a malfunction with the SRS.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds.
• It remains on if the parking brake is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding brake fluid, check all brake components for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is found, or if the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure is required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

- When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.

(Continued)

(Continued)

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

i Information - Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the EPS.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the emission control system.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Driving with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control system which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.

NOTICE

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Charging System Warning Light

When this warning light illuminates while running the engine, the battery is not being charged. Immediately turn OFF all electrical accessories. Try not to use electrically operated controls, such as the power windows. Keep running the engine.

Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter 7). If the level is low, add oil as required. If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• If the engine does not stop immediately after the Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

• If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case:

• Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

• Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.

• Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Washer Fluid Warning Light (if equipped)

Master Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

- When the fuel tank is nearly empty. Add fuel as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

This warning light illuminates:

- When the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty. In this case, you should refill the washer fluid.

Door Ajar Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When a door is not closed securely.

Trunk Open Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the trunk lid is not closed securely.

This indicator light illuminates:

- When there is a malfunction in operation in any of the following systems:

• Lower washer fluid (if equipped)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction
• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) malfunction (if equipped)

To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated.

For more details, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

This warning light remains ON after blinking for approximately 60 seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON and OFF in 3 second intervals:

• When there is a malfunction with the TPMS.
  In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

For more details, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

WARNING

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.
  In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

- While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

Immobilizer Indicator Light (without smart key) (if equipped)

Immobilizer Indicator Light (with smart key (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you place the ignition switch to the ON position.
• It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.

For more details, refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in the key with the ignition switch in the ON position.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

- When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

- When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON position.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the vehicle.
• At this time, you cannot start the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off:

- If the smart key is in the vehicle and the Engine Start/Stop button is ON, but the vehicle cannot detect the smart key.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

- When the battery voltage of the smart key is low.

- At this time, you can not start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key. (For more details, refer to "Starting the Engine" in chapter 5).

- When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator Light

This indicator light blinks:

- When you operate the turn signal indicator light.

If any of the following occur, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system.

• The turn signal indicator light illuminates but does not blink
• The turn signal indicator light blinks rapidly
• The turn signal indicator light does not illuminate at all

If any of these conditions occur, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on and in the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the tail lights or headlights are on.

Front Fog Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the front fog lights are on.

LED Headlamp Warning Light (if equipped)

Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)

CRUISE

SPORT Mode Indicator Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you turn the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.
• When there is a malfunction with the LED headlamp.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a LED headlamp related part.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Continuous driving with the LED Headlamp Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED headlamp life.

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more details, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator Light (if equipped)

SET

This indicator light illuminates:

- When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to "Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:

When you select "SPORT" mode as drive mode.

For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA) Warning light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates :

• When the FCA system is turned off.
• When the radar sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow. Check the sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.
• When there is a malfunction with FCA. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer of HYUNDAI.

For more information, refer to "Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)" in chapter 5.

LCD Display Messages

Shift to P or N to start engine (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

i Information

You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

Shift to P (for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in P (Park) position.

At this time, the Engine Start/Stop button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop button once more, it will turn to the ON position).

Low key battery (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the battery of the smart key is discharged while changing the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position.

Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system and intelligent variable transmission)

This warning message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (for smart key system and manual transmission)

This warning message is displayed if the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal.

You can start the engine by depressing the clutch pedal to.

Key not in vehicle (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the Engine Start/Stop button.

When attempting to start the vehicle, always have the smart key with you.

Key not detected (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Press START button again (for smart key system)

This message is displayed if you were unable to start the vehicle when the Engine Start/Stop button was pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button again.

If the warning message appears each time you press the Engine Start/Stop button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Press START button with key (for smart key system)

This warning message is displayed if you press the Engine Start/Stop button while the warning message "Key not detected" is displayed.

At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

Door, Hood, Trunk Open

Top-down view of a car with open doors indicating lanes (no text or symbols)

OHCR046126

This warning is displayed indicating which door, or hood, or trunk is open.

CAUTION

Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/ hood/trunk is fully closed. Also, check there is no door /hood/trunk open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.

Low Pressure

Low Pressure psi OHCA067005

Lights Mode

Lights ID AUTO OFF

This warning message is displayed if the tire pressure is low. The corresponding tire on the vehicle will be illuminated.

This indicator displays which exterior light is selected using the lighting control.

Wiper Mode (if equipped)

Front Front Wiper OFF INT LO HI Rear Rear Wiper HI LO OFF OPD047125L/OPD047126L

This indicator displays which wiper speed is selected using the wiper control.

For more details, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Low washer fluid (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.

Low fuel

This warning message is displayed if the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the low fuel level warning light in the cluster will come on.

It is recommended to look for the nearest fueling station and refuel as soon as possible.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Engine overheated

This warning message is displayed when the engine coolant temperature is above 248^ F ( 120^ C). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

Check headlight (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if the headlights are not operating properly. A headlight bulb may need to be replaced.

i Information

Make sure to replace the burned out bulb with a new one of the same wattage rating.

Check Forward Collision Avoidance Assist system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a malfunction with the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system. We recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

LCD DISPLAY

LCD Display Control

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up inset showing the dashboard panel (no text or symbols visible)

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons.

(1) MODE button for changing modes
(2) ∧, ∨ : MOVE switch changing items
(3) OK: SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the selected item

LCD Display Modes

Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer		This mode displays driving information such as the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
User Settings		In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Warning		This mode displays warning messages related to the systems.

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

for

Engage parking brake to edit settings/Shift to P to edit settings

This warning message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driving.

- Manual transmission

For your safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and moving the shift lever to neutral.

- Intelligent variable transmission For your safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and moving the shift lever to P (Park).

Quick guide help

This mode provides quick guides for the systems in the User Settings mode.

Select an item, press and hold the OK button.

For more information about each system, refer to this Owner's Manual.

Trip computer mode

Assist mode

Tire Pressure psi

OAD045152N/OHCA047716 OHCA067007

The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including fuel economy, tripmeter information and vehicle speed.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information related to Tire Pressure.

For more information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

CRUISE --- MPH

OHCA047719

Cruise control

This mode displays the state of the cruise control.

For more information, refer to Cruise control system information in chapter 5.

Warning mode

If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed on the LCD display for several seconds.

• Lower washer fluid (if equipped)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction
• Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the settings of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc.

1. Driving Assist
2. Door
3. Lights
4. Convenience
5. Service Interval
6. Other
7. Reset

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

1. Driving Assist

- Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)

To activate or deactivate the Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA).

For more information, refer to "Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)" in chapter 5.

2. Door

• Auto Lock
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3 mph (15 km/h).

• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position. (Only when the engine is running. But the vehicle equipped with a manual transmission does not have the function.)

• Auto Unlock

• Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• On Key Out: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the key ignition switch (if equipped with remote key).
• Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position (if equipped with smart key).

• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position. (Only when the engine is running. But the vehicle equipped with a manual transmission does not have the function.)

• Two Press Unlock

• Off: The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed.
• On: Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.
• Smart Trunk(for Smart key)

To activate or deactivate the Smart Trunk system.

For more information, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.

1. Lights

• One Touch Turn Signal
- Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more information, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.

- Headlight Delay

If this item is checked, the Headlight Delay will be activated.

1. Convenience

- Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you change the mode.

- Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display. (if equipped with intelligent variable transmission)

5. Service Interval

- Service Interval

To activate or deactivate the service interval function.

- Adjust Interval

If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.

i Information

To use the service interval menu, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

i Information

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

• The battery cable is disconnected.
• The fuse switch is turned off.
• The battery is discharged.

6. Other

• Fuel Econ. Reset
• Off: The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition: When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.
• After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

• Fuel Econ. Unit
  To select the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
• Temperature Unit
  To select the temperature unit. (°C, °F)
• Language
  To select language.

7. Reset

You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in the User Settings Mode are reset to factory settings, except language and service interval.

TRIP COMPUTER

Type A

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

i Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip modes

graph TD
    A["FUEL ECONOMY"] --> B["TRIP A"]
    B --> C["TRIP B"]
    C --> D["Digital Speedometer"]
    A -->|Range\nAverage Fuel Economy\nInstant Fuel Economy| B
    B -->|Tripmeter["A"]\nAverage_Vehicle_Speed["A"]\nElapsed_Time["A"]| C
    C -->|Tripmeter["B"]\nAverage_Vehicle_Speed["B"]\nElapsed_Time["B"]| D

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up inset showing the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

To change the trip mode, press the TRIP button on the steering wheel.

Range

RANGE 18.8ml AVG. 35.0 MPG 0 25 503 OHCA047714

Range (1)

- The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel in the fuel tank.

- Distance range:

- If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will display "----" as the range.

i Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the range function may not operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallon (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

- The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.

Fuel economy range: 0.0 \~ 99.9 MPG

- To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving when the vehicle speed is greater than 6.2 mph [10 kph].

- Fuel economy range: 0 \~ 50 MPG

Trip A/B

TRIP 88888mi① TIMER 8888h② AVG. 15.0MPH③ OAD045152N

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
• Distance range: 0.0 \~ 9999.9 mi. or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.

Elapsed Time (2)

• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time reset.
• Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 \~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is displayed.

i Information

The elapsed time will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

Average Vehicle Speed (3)

- The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.

- Speed range: 0\~160 MPH or 0\~260 km/h

- To reset the average vehicle speed, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

i Information

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance has been less than 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button was turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed will continue to be calculated and will start to decrease if the vehicle is stopped while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

Service information

10:00:00 mi 30 days

If the remaining mileage or time reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30 days, the service symbol ( ) will blink for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

i Information

To change or deactivate the service interval, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- 100/1mi 5 days

OAD045181N

If you exceed the specified service interval, the service symbol ( ) will blink each time you turn ON the vehicle.

To reset the service interval, press the RESET button for more than 5 seconds and then when the miles and days blink press the RESET button for more than 1 second.

If the service interval is not set, the service symbol ( ) will not be displayed.

Digital speedometer

SPEED OFF

55 MPH SPEED ON

OAD045177N/OAD045178NOAD045180N

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (in mph).

To turn the digital speedometer ON and OFF press the RESET button for more than 1 second when the digital speedometer is displayed.

Type B

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

i Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip modes

graph TD
    A["Fuel Economy\n• Average Fuel Economy\n• Instant Fuel Economy"] <--> B["Drive Info\n• Tripmeter\n• Fuel Economy\n• Timer"]
    B <--> C["Accumulated Info\n• Tripmeter\n• Fuel Economy\n• Timer"]
    C <--> D["Digital Speedometer"]

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a close-up inset showing the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

To change the trip mode, toggle the "^," switch on the steering wheel.

Average fuel economy/Instant fuel economy

Average 35.0 MPG Instant 17.2 MPG 0 25 50 Hold OK : Reset

OHCA047715

Average Fuel Economy (1)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average fuel economy, select between "After Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the User Settings mode on the LCD display.

• After Ignition: When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will reset automatically.
• After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

- This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving.

Accumulated Info display

Accumulated Trip 247.5mi Avg. 35.0MFG Timer 17:42h Hold OK : Reset

OHCA047716 OPD047468N

This display shows the accumulated trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is accumulated starting from the last reset.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Accumulated driving info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

The accumulated driving information will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light).

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

Drive Info display

Drive Info Trip 1752.4mi Avg. 12.6 MPG Timer 23:27h Hold OK : Reset

This display shows the trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is combined for each ignition cycle. However, when the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the Drive Info screen will reset.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Drive Info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

The driving information will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light).

i Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

Digital speedometer

70 MPH OPDE046145R

This message shows the speed of the vehicle.

LIGHTING

Exterior Lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

Type A 3 2 1 OHCA047722

Type B 4 3 2 1 OHCA047723

■Type C 4 3 2 1 OHCA047703

Type A

(1) OFF position
(2) Parking lamp position
(3) Headlamp position

Type B

(1) OFF position
(2) AUTO light position
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position

Type C

(1) DRL OFF position
(2) AUTO position
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position

Daytime running light (DRL) (if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when :

• The light switch is in the DRL OFF position.
• The headlamps are ON.
• The parking lamps are ON.
• The vehicle is turned off.
• The parking brake is set.

AUTO ① OHCA047320

AUTO light position (if equipped) The parking lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, driving in the rain, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located in front of the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the AUTO light system may not work properly.

Close-up of a hand holding a black handheld device with control buttons and a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols visible)

Parking lamp position (305)

The parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

Hand holding a black handheld device with a blue arrow indicating rotation, showing control panel and buttons (no readable text or symbols)

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

i Information

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlamp.

High beam operation

CA047378 OHCA047343

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position. The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

Diagram showing a hand interacting with a device's left-hand interface, highlighting a blue arrow and control buttons.

OHCA047347

To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

1 OTL047258

Fog lamps are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use the switch next to the headlamp switch to turn the fog lamps ON and OFF.

1. Turn on the parking lamp.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front fog lamp position.
3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn the light switch to the front fog lamp position again or turn off the parking lamp.

NOTICE

When in operation, the fog lamps consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lamps when visibility is poor.

Turn signals and lane change signals

A B B A 3D 3DC RWD 3D 3DC 3D 3D OHCA047348

To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A).

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

Onetouch turn signal function

To activate the One Touch Turn Signal function, push the turn signal lever up or down to position (B) and then release it.

The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times.

You can activate or deactivate the One Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinks (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings mode (Light) on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lamp when the driver turns the vehicle off and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the vehicle is turned off, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlamp delay function (if equipped)

If the key is removed from the ignition switch or placed in the ACC position or the LOCK/OFF position with the headlamps ON, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. Also, with the engine off if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlamps (and/or parking lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the remote key or smart key twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or AUTO position. You can activate or deactivate the Headlamp Delay function from the User Settings Mode (Light) on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the "LCD Display" section in this chapter.

NOTICE

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, it causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

Interior Lights

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. The interior lights may obscure your view and cause an accident.

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the vehicle is turned off or the battery will discharge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the engine is turned off and the doors are closed. If a door is opened, the lamp will go off 40 minutes after the engine is turned off. If the doors are locked by the remote key or smart key and the vehicle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.

Front lamps

OPDE046041

(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Room Lamp
(3) Front Door Lamp

Front Map Lamp (1) :

Press either lenses to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

Front room lamp (2)

•

Press the button to turn ON the room lamp for the front/rear seats.

• :

Press the button to turn OFF the room lamp for the front/rear seats regardless of front or rear door open position.

Front Door Lamp (3) ()

The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened if the engine is running or not. When doors are unlocked by the remote key or smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The front and rear room lamps go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds when the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC position or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

Rear lamp

Close-up of a metallic rectangular panel with a blue button and arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Rear Room Lamp ( ) :
Press this switch to turn the rear room lamp on and off.

Luggage compartment lamp

Illustration of a car trunk with open lid and internal structure, showing a close-up inset (no text or symbols)

The luggage compartment lamp comes on when the trunk is opened.

NOTICE

The luggage compartment lamp comes on as long as the trunk is open. To prevent unnecessary battery system drain, close the trunk securely after using the luggage compartment.

Welcome System (if equipped)

Welcome light (if equipped)

Headlamp and parking lamp

When the headlamp (with the lamp switch in the headlamp or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and trunk) are locked and closed, the parking lamp and headlamp will come on for 15 seconds when the door unlock button is pressed on the remote key or smart key.

At this time, if you press the door lock of unlock button on the remote key or smart key the parking lamp and headlamp will turn off immediately.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is pressed on the remote key or smart key.
• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button on the remote key or smart key the room lamp will turn off immediately.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

A MIST OFF INT LO HI B C OHCA047724

A : Wiper speed control

• MIST – Single wipe
  · OFF - Off
• INT – Intermittent wipe
• LO - Low wiper speed
  · HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (pull lever towards you)

Windshield Wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

MIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation.

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. To vary the speed setting, move the speed control lever. The top most setting will run the wipers most frequently (for more rain). The bottom setting will run the wipers the least frequently (for less rain).

LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

i Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

Windshield Washers

INT MIST OFF INT LD HI OYC046419

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windshield using the defroster to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM Rear View Monitor

Interior view of a car showing dashboard, steering wheel, and camera screen (no readable text or symbols)

Rear View Monitor will activate when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

This is a supplemental system that helps provide a view of the area behind the vehicle through the audio display while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position.

WARNING

Rear View Monitor is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the Rear View Monitor when backing-up.
  • ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.
  • Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

NOTICE

Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with dirt, water or snow.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

A/C MAX ① ② ③ A/C + ④ 0 * ⑤ REAR

1. Temperature control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Fan speed control knob
4. Air intake control button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. A/C (Air conditioning) button*

*: if equipped

OHCA047303

Heating and Air Conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position. To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling, select:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

1. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air or recirculated air position.
3. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
4. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

When starting the vehicle in cold weather a more efficient way to heat the passenger compartment is to do the following.

• Turn off or lower the blower, right after starting the engine.
  • Engine temperature is still low and the air flow from the heater is still cold.
• After a few minutes of engine warm up, turn on or set the fan to a higher level and adjust the temperature setting to hot.

Mode selection

A A A A A A D B B C C E E

OHCR046365/OYC046322

The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield, side window defrosters, and side vents.

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters, and side vents.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side vents.

Close-up of a car dashboard dial with a circular knob and adjustment knob (no visible text or symbols)

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position cannot be selected. Turn the fan speed mode to adjust.

After the interior has cooled sufficiently, whenever possible, move the temperature knob away from Max AC and press the A/C button.

Instrument panel vents

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

You can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

Circular mechanical knob with blue directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

The temperature will increase by turning the knob to the right. The temperature will decrease by turning the knob to the left.

Air intake control

Close-up of a car dashboard with a blue control knob and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i Information

Using the system in the fresh air position is recommended.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) can cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position (without the air conditioning selected) may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious injury or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Fan speed control

A/C 0 +

OHCA047379 OHCA047380

Turn the knob to the right to increase the fan speed and airflow. Turn the knob to the left to decrease fan speed and airflow.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the "0" position turns off the fan.

NOTICE

Operating the fan speed when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the fan speed when the engine is running.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Circular black dial with white indicator lights and 'A/C' symbol, no readable text or numbers beyond the label

Push the A/C button to turn the system on (indicator light will illuminate) and off.

System Operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
   If the windshield fogs up, select the Floor & Defrost mode or press the Front Defrost mode.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• To help prevent the inside of the windshield from fogging, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level → mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

NOTICE

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the engine temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation can cause engine overheating.

Continue to use the fan, but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
  • After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.
• If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.

System Maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air Recirculated air Blower Climate control air filter Evaporator core Heater core 1LDA5047

This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system.

Have the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also reduces the performance of the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Since the refrigerant is mildly flammable and operated at high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important

that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant are used.

All refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment.

Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to individuals and environment. Failure to heed these warnings can lead to serious injuries.

Front view of a white car with a grille and dashboard, showing a close-up of the grille and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Air Conditioning refrigerant label You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood.

Example

④ ⑤ ⑥ ① R-1234yf ② XXX±XXg ③ PAG SAE J639 J2842 J2845

OHYK059001

Each symbols and specification on the air conditioning refrigerant label is represented as below:

1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of compressor lubricant
4. Caution
5. Flammable refrigerant
6. To require registered technician to service air conditioning system

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

AUTO AUTO 88:8°C AUTO AIDS OFF OFF FRONT REAR A/C

1. Temperature control knob
2. Fan speed control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. Air intake control button
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defrost button
7. Rear window defrost button
8. Mode selection button
9. Air conditioning button
10. Climate control information screen

OHCA047300

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning

Circular digital interface knob with 'AUTO' label and blue upward arrow (no readable text or symbols beyond branding)

The Automatic Climate Control System is controlled by setting the desired temperature.

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by the temperature setting you select.

Circular dial indicator with 'AUTO' label and blue curved arrows, no readable text or symbols beyond the label

1. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously. After the interior has cooled sufficiently, adjust the knob to a higher temperature set point whenever possible.

To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

• Mode selection button
• Front windshield defroster button (Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)
• Fan speed control button

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73°F (23°C).

To change the temperature unit from °F to °C or °C to °F:

Press and hold the AUTO and OFF buttons on the climate control unit for 3 seconds.

Close-up of a blue plastic component with a circular button, placed on a metallic surface with three recessed slots (no text or symbols visible)

NOTICE

Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling, select:

• Heating: √

• Cooling:

• Set the temperature control to the desired position.

• Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
• Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
• If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
• Press the AUTO button to convert to full automatic control of the system.

When starting the vehicle in cold weather using manual temperature control, operate the system in the following method to improve heating.

• Turn off or lower the blower, right after starting the engine.
• Allow the engine to warm up during this time since the air flow from the heater is still cold.
• After a few minutes of engine warm up, turn on or set the fan to a higher level and adjust the temperature setting to hot.

Mode selection

A A A A A A D B B C C E E OHCR046370/OHCR046366

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet direction is cycled as follows:

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

FRONT

OHCM047310

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing dashboard controls and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

You can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

Circular dial indicator with 'AUTO' label and blue curved arrows, no readable text or symbols beyond the indicator itself.

Air intake control

Circular digital interface with a glowing icon and an upward arrow, no readable text or symbols.

Turn the knob to the right to increase the temperature. Turn the knob to the left to decrease temperature.

The temperature will increase or decrease by 1^ F/0.5°C for each incremental location. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i Information

Using the system in the fresh air position is recommended.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) can cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position (without the air conditioning selected) may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious injury or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Fan speed control

Circular digital interface with a car icon and blue curved arrows, no readable text or symbols

OYC046317

The fan speed can be set as desired by turning the fan speed control knob.

More air is delivered with higher fan speeds.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

i Information

For better sound quality, fan speed may automatically slow down for a couple of minutes when you activate voice recognition or hands free.

NOTICE

Operating the fan when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the fan when the engine is running.

Air conditioning

A/C

OHCR046308 OHCM047311

Push the A/C button to manually turn the system on (indicator light will illuminate) and off.

OFF mode

OFF

Push the OFF button to turn the climate control system off. You can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

System Operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
   If the windshield fogs up, select the Floor & Defrost mode or press the Front Defrost mode.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• To help prevent the inside of the windshield from fogging, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level → mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

NOTICE

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the engine temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation can cause engine overheating. Continue to use the fan, but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.
- Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.
- If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.

System Maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air Recirculated air Blower Climate control air filter Evaporator core Heater core 1LDA5047

This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system.

Have the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also reduces the performance of the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Since the refrigerant is mildly flammable and operated at high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important

that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant are used.

All refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment.

Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to individuals and environment. Failure to heed these warnings can lead to serious injuries.

Front view of a white car with a blue arrow pointing to the grille and a magnified inset showing a device (no text or symbols visible)

Air Conditioning refrigerant label You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood.

Example

④ ⑤ ⑥ ① R-1234yf ② XXX±XXg ③ PAG SAE J639 J2842 J2845

OHYK059001

Each symbols and specification on the air conditioning refrigerant label is represented as below:

1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of compressor lubricant
4. Caution
5. Flammable refrigerant
6. To require registered technician to service air conditioning system

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING

Windshield heating

Do not use the 📋 or 🔊 position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility could cause an accident resulting in serious injury or death. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the 🔊 position and fan speed control knob or button to a lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, side view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

NOTICE

If the engine temperature is still cold after starting, then a brief engine warm up period may be required for the vented air flow to become warm or hot.

Manual Climate Control System

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except "0" position.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Select the or position
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air conditioning will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the position.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

A/C 1 2 3 4 A/C OHCA047313

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic Climate Control System

1 2 3 4 FRONT A/C OHCM047314

To defog inside windshield

1. Select the desired fan speed.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( )
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

1 2 3 4 FRONT A/C OHCM047315

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( )
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Defogging logic (if equipped)

To help reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as positions. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn to the defroster position ( )
3. Press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 10 seconds.

The indicator immediately blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Press the defroster button ( )
3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The air intake indicator will blink 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Auto Defogging System (Only for Automatic Climate Control System, if equipped)

Exterior view of a modern sedan car with a front grille and side window (no visible text or symbols)

Auto defogging reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture on inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.

i Information

The auto defogging system may not operate normally, when the outside temperature is below 50 °F (-10 °C).

When the Auto Defogging System operates, the indicator will illuminate.

If high levels of moisture are sensed in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System will operate in the following order:

Step 1: Outside air position

Step 2: Operating the air conditioning

Step 3: Blowing air toward the wind-shield

Step 4: Increasing air flow toward the windshield

If the air conditioning is off or recirculated air position is manually selected while Auto Defogging System is ON, the Auto Defogging System Indicator will blink 3 times to signal that the manual operation has been canceled.

To cancel or reset the

Auto Defogging System

Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, the ADS OFF symbol will blink 3 times and ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is reset, the ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal.

i Information

• When the air conditioning is turned on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air conditioning, the indicator will blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position while the Auto defogging system is operating.
• When Auto defogging mode is selected, fan speed, temperature and intake mode which is adjusted manually are canceled for better defogging result.

NOTICE

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the windshield glass.

Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

Rear Window Defroster

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to the "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging" section in this chapter.

■ Manual climate control system A/C + PAR

OHCA047304

■Automatic climate control system REAR

OHCM047317

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, while the engine is running.

• To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.
  • To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

i Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
  • The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.

Side view mirror defroster

If your vehicle is equipped with the side view mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

NOTICE

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Center Console Storage (if equipped)

Interior view of a car seatbelt with blue directional arrows indicating movement, inset shows a car wheel (no text or symbols)

To open :

Grab and hold the latch (1) on the arm rest then lift the lid.

Sliding Armrest (if equipped)

Interior view of a car showing a blue car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

To move the armrest forward:

Pull up the latch (1) then pull the armrest forward.

To move the armrest rearward:

Pull up the latch (1) then push the armrest rearward.

Glove Box

Interior view of a car showing the side door and seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols on the main components.

To open:
Pull the lever (1).

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box door after use.

An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.

Sunglass Holder

Interior view of a car showing a blue vent with arrows indicating flow direction, no text or symbols present.

To open:

Push and release the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is closed while driving.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

Multi Box

Interior view of a car showing the left side of the dashboard and the right side of the gear shift, with no visible text or symbols.

To keep the objects, use the multi boxes. Makes sure that the objects in multi boxes don't distract the driver.

WARNING

Do not keep objects that can be thrown from the multi box and severely injure passengers in the vehicle in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

INTERIOR FEATURES

Cup Holder

Interior view of a car showing two blue eyeglasses with a magnified inset highlighting the lens (no text or symbols)

Cups or small beverages cups may be placed in the cup holders.

WARNING

- Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid while the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.

NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

Ashtray (For Canada, if equipped)

3D rendered mechanical component with blue and gray casing, no visible text or symbols

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean the ashtray:

The plastic receptacle should be removed by lifting the plastic ashtray receptacle upward after turning the cover counterclockwise and pulling it out.

WARNING

Ashtray use

Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

Sunvisor

4 2 3 5 1 OHCA047330

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (4) as needed. Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets.

NOTICE

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

WARNING

For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvisor.

NOTICE

Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.

Power Outlet (if equipped)

■Front T2V 1800M OHCA047377

Close-up of a white toilet with a blue control knob and 'Center' label (no other text or symbols visible)

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180 W (Watts) with the engine running.

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the Power Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180 W (Watts) in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use. (Continued)

(Continued)

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and cause system malfunction.

Cigarette lighter (For Canada, if equipped)

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a blue cursor icon pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

To use the cigarette lighter, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

Push the cigarette lighter all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.

We recommend that you use parts for replacement from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the socket of the cigarette lighter. It may damage the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug-in accessories (shavers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.

Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driving, you may lose your steering control and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury or death.

Vehicles with Audio system

Select the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Date/Time].

• Set time: Set the time displayed on the audio screen.
  • Time format: Choose between 12-hour and 24-hour time formats.

Vehicles with Navigation system

Select the Settings menu on the Navigation system →Select [Date/Time].

• GPS time: Displays time according to the received GNSS time.
• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24 hour.

Clothes Hanger (if equipped)

Close-up of a car interior panel with a highlighted blue button (no text or symbols visible)

These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.

WARNING

Interior view of a car showing a blue hanger with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothes pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

Floor Mat Anchor(s)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted component and dotted lines indicating alignment or alignment (no text or symbols)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.

WARNING

Do not overlay additional mats or liners over the floor mats. If using All Weather mats, remove the carpeted floor mats before installing them. Only use floor mats designed to connect to the anchors.

WARNING

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends that the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Luggage Net Holder (if equipped)

Interior view of a car trunk with a mesh-covered roof and metallic casing (no visible text or symbols)

To keep items from shifting in the luggage compartment, you can use the 4 holders located in the luggage compartment to attach the luggage net.

Make sure the luggage net is securely attached to the holders in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net's recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

Infotainment System

Infotainment System....4-2

AUX, USB and iPod® Port....4-2

Antenna 4-2

Steering Wheel Audio Control....4-3

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free .....4-4

How Vehicle Audio Works 4-5

Features of Your Vehicle....4-7

Audio (With Touch Screen) 4-9

Feature of Your Audio 4-10

Feature of Your Audio 4-13

Radio....4-18

SiriusXM Radio....4-21

Media....4-22

Phone 4-34

Setup 4-42

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

NOTICE

• If you install an aftermarket HID head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic devices may not function properly.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

AUX, USB and iPod® Port

Interior view of a car gear shift control unit with a blue indicator panel and mechanical lever (no visible text or symbols)

You can use an AUX or USB cable to connect audio devices to the vehicle AUX or USB port.

Antenna

Side view of a silver sedan with a black arrow pointing to the roof (no visible text or symbols)

The roof antenna receives AM/FM signals.

i Information

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the portable audio device's power source.

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

NOTICE

• Remove the antenna by rotating it in a counter-clockwise direction, before entering a place with a low floor height. If not, the antenna may be damaged.
• Securely install the antenna in the upright position. This is to guarantee proper signal reception. However, you may fold and remove the antenna, before parking the vehicle or loading the luggage on the roof rack.
• Do not load the luggage near the antenna. This is to guarantee proper signal reception.

Steering Wheel Audio Control

■ Type A 1 4 2 ■ Type B 4 3 1 2 OHCA047708

NOTICE

Do not operate multiple audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Press the VOLUME switch up to increase volume.
• Press the VOLUME switch down to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET (/A) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down and held for 0.8 second or more, it will function in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/RW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down, it will function in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION UP/DOWN button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

MODE (3)

Press the MODE button to toggle through Radio, SXM, or AUX modes.

MUTE (4)

• Press the MUTE button to mute the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.

i Information

Detailed information for audio control buttons are described in the separately supplied manual with the vehicle.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free

OHCR046338 OPD046348

With the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology in the vehicle, you can use the phone wireless.

(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button

(3) Microphone

Detailed information for the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology hands-free is described in the Car Multimedia User's Manual.

How Vehicle Audio Works

FM reception

IONOSPHERE JBM001

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM reception

IONOSPHERE JBM002

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Iron bridges"]
    C --> D["Unobstructed area"]
    D --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

JBM004

Station 2 88.1Mhz A B C Station 2 88.3Mhz A B JBM005

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

Features of Your Vehicle

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in receiving XM™ satellite radio signals in the following situations.

Diagram illustrating satellite communication with speech bubbles and a megaphone, showing signal waves and speech bubbles.

SATELLITE1

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.
  • If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.

• If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (30 ft. /10m or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense forest.

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Iron bridges"]
    C --> D["Unobstructed area"]
    D --> E["Satellite"]
    E --> F["Car with Note"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

- The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the XM™ repeater network.

i Information

There may also be additional unforeseen circumstances leading to reception problems with the XM ^TM satellite radio signal.

Advisory Messages, such as 'CH Unavailable' may occur when starting XM™ Radio.

iPod®

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

A Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone compatibility can be checked by visiting https://www.hyundaiusa.com/bluetooth.

Bluetooth®

AUDIO (With Touch Screen)

■ Type A

RADIO MEDIA V SEEK TRACK A DSP SETUP POWER START FIRE TUBE ONION

■ Type B

POWER TURRY RADIO MEDIA SEEK TRACK A DISP SETUP FLE TURE ENTER

J0H4H0000EU/J0H4H0001EU

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

■ Type A RADIO MEDIA SEE TRACK DISP BE ■ Type B RADIO MEDIA SEE TRACK DISP BE ■ Power Power Power

* The actual image in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) POWER/VOL knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.

(2) RADIO

• Start FM, AM and SiriusXM* Radio.
  * if equipped

(3) MEDIA

• Select USB (iPod®) or AUX or My Music.
• Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.

(4) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in radio mode.
• Search for next station in SiriusXM* radio mode.
• Change the current song in media mode.
  * if equipped

■ Type A MEDIA ✓ SEEK TRACK A DISP SETUP 5 6 ■ Type B MEDIA ✓ SEEK TRACK A DISP SETUP 5 6 8 7 OUTPUT

(5) DISP
- Turn the display on or off.
(6) SETUP
- Access Display, Sound, Date/Time, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

(7) TUNE knob
- Turn to navigate through the stations/songs list.
- Press to select an item.
(8) RESET
- Shutdown and restart the system.

■ Type C

POWER SUPPORT RADIO MEDIA V SEEK TRACK A PHONE SETUP FSL MODE TYPE 2000

■ Type D

POWER RADIO MEDIA V SEEK TRACK A PHONE SETUP TLE TUNE 201100

(With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology)

J0H4H0002EU/J0H4H0003EU

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

■ Type C ■ Type D 1 2 3 4 RADIO MEDIA ✓ SEEK TRACK ↗ PHONE ↕ ■ TYPE D 1 2 3 4

* The actual image in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) POWER/VOL knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.

(2) RADIO

• Start FM, AM and SiriusXM* Radio.
  * if equipped

(3) MEDIA

• Select USB (iPo®), Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (BT) Audio, AUX or My Music.
• Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.

(4) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in radio mode.
• Search for next station in SiriusXM* radio mode.
• Change the current song in media mode.
  * if equipped

Infotainment System

(5) PHONE

- Start Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Phone mode.

(6) SETUP

- Access Display, Sound, Date/Time, Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

(7) TUNE knob

- Turn to navigate through the stations/songs list.

- Press to select an item.

(8) RESET

- Shutdown and restart the system.

Steering wheel remote control

Diagram of a car steering wheel with labeled control buttons and a close-up inset showing the function keys.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with labeled control panel and numbered parts, showing dashboard and steering wheel layout.

(Bluetooth® Wireless Technology equipped model)

* The actual image in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) MUTE

• Mutes the audio.
• Mutes the microphone during a call. (Bluetooth® Wireless Technology equipped model)

(2) MODE

• Press the button to change the mode in the following order: Radio → Media.
• Press and hold the button to turn off.

(3) VOLUME

- Press to adjust the volume.

(4) UP/DOWN

• Press the button in radio mode to search Presets.
• Press and hold the button in radio mode to search frequencies.
• Press the button in media mode to change the current song. (except AUX)
• Press and hold the button in media mode to quick search through songs. (except Bluetooth® Wireless Technology(BT) Audio and AUX)

(5) CALL (if equipped)

- Pressing the button

• If not in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call.
  First press: Display Dial Number screen.

Second press: Automatically display the most recently Dialed Call number.

Third press: Dial the phone number entered.

- Press in the Incoming Call notification screen to accept the phone call.

- Press in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.

- Pressing and holding the button (over 1.0 seconds)

- If not in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.

• Press in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to transfer the call to your cell phone.
• Press in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree mode.

(6) END (if equipped)

• Press in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to end the phone call.
• Press in the incoming call screen to reject the call.

WARNING

Audio System Safety Warnings

• Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.
• Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire or electric shock.
  • Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Exercise caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.
- Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.
- Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
- Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.
- Use the system with the vehicle engine turned on. Prolonged use with the ignition turned on only could result in battery discharge.

WARNING

Distracted Diriving

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

NOTICE

• Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)
• Turn on the car engine before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time only with the ignition turned on as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD.
• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use rough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.). As such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.
  • In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

Information on status icons
Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Icon Description
	Mute Mute	engaged
	Battery	Remaining battery life of a connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
	Handsfree + Audio streaming connection	Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree call and audio streaming available
	Handsfree connection	Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree call available
	Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming	Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming available

Icon Description
[84XY]	Downloading contacts	Downloading contacts throughBluetooth®Wireless Technology communications
	Downloading call history	Downloading call history throughBluetooth®Wireless Technology communications
[5822]	Line busy Phone call in progress
[VA64]	Mute mic	Mic muted during a call (caller cannot hear your voice)
[5X40]	Phone signal strength	Display the phone signal strength for a cell phone connected byBluetooth®Wireless Technology

Radio

You can listen to FM, AM and SiriusXM* radio.

FM 12:00 AM 87.5 1 2 3 REC 4 5 FM 87.5 AM 530 SXM 1 + + ① Band ② Presets > ③ List ④ Menu

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM* radio.

* if equipped

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the main screen.

(3) List

Display all available stations.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Presets 1\~40

Save or listen to favorite stations.

Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM\* radio

• Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM* radio.
• Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM* radio.
  * if equipped

Searching stations

Searching stations by pressing the [SEEK/TRACK] button on the product.

By selecting [< Presets >], the buttons for Presets 1\~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.

Presets 1\~40

Select the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current station. If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the station to the slot.

List

A list of all available stations is displayed. Select the desired station. Favorite stations can be saved to [Presets] by selecting the [+].

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently used stations. To listen to a preset, select the desired station. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the station to the slot.
• Scan: All stations available in the current location of the vehicle are played for five seconds each.
  • Information: View detailed station information.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.
• Station Info: Set whether to receive station information such as Station Name, Program Type or Information.

i Information - SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information (if equipped)

• Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. You'll get over variable channels, including commercial free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

- Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

• SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on a personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include:

- Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

- For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

(Continued)

(Continued)

- SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous states, DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

SiriusXM Radio (if equipped)

SiriusXM 12:00 AM CH 1 Channel Category ⑥ Play Live ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ 1 2 3 REG 4 5 FM 87.5 AM 530 SXM 1 + + ① Band ② Presets > ③ List ④ Menu

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM radio.

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the main screen.

(3) List

Display all channels.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Presets 1\~40

Save or listen to favorite channels.

(6) Play Live

Switches to the live broadcast mode.

(7) Skip Backward

Repeats the previously broadcasted program.

- Pressing the button: Moves to the previous segment.

- Pressing and holding the button (over 1.0 seconds): Moves to the previous 5 seconds.

(8) Play/Pause

Pauses/plays the current broadcasting program.

(9) Skip Forward

Moves to the next segment.

Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM radio

- Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM radio.

- Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM radio.

Searching channels

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search channels.

By selecting [< Presets >], the buttons for Presets 1\~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.

Presets 1\~40

Select the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current channel.

List

A list of all channels is displayed. Select the desired channel.

Favorite channels can be saved to [Presets] by selecting the [+].

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently used channels. To listen to a preset, select the desired channel. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current channel in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the channel to the slot.
• Categories: Channels can be searched by category.
• Direct Tune: The desired channel can be selected by entering numbers.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.
• Tag Song: Tag the current song information. When an Apple device (iPhone®, iPod®) is connected, tagged song information is sent automatically to the connected device.

i Information

Up to 50 songs can be tagged.

• Scan: All channels available in the vehicle's current location are played for ten seconds each.
• Program Schedule: View the Program schedule.
• Featured Favorites: The Featured Favorites feature allows SiriusXM™ to broadcast additional presets.

- Example 1: During holidays, "Holiday Music" might include all SiriusXM™ channels that are playing holiday music for easy access by users.

Multiple sets of Featured Favorites data can be broadcast by SiriusXM™ and can change from time to time.

• Information: View detailed channel information.

- Category Lock: Search or scan channels in the current category only.

Media

i Information - Using MP3

Supported audio formats

Audio formats	WAVEform audio format
Compressed audio formats	MPEG1 Audio Layer3
	MPEG2 Audio Layer3
	MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3
	Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X & 8.X

NOTICE

File formats other than the formats above may not be recognized or playable. Information such as filename may not be displayed.

Range of supported file types

1. Bitrate range (Kbps)

BIT RATE(kbps)	MPEG1	MPEG2	MPEG2.5	WMA
	Layer3			High Range
	32	8	8	48
	40	16	16	64
	48	24	24	80
	56	32	32	96
	64	40	40	128
	80	48	48	160
	96	56	56	192
	112	64	64
	128	80	80
	160	96	96
	192	112	112
	224	128	128
	256	144	144
	320	160	160
	WAV
	PCM(Stereo)		IMA ADPCM	MS ADPCM
	24		4	4

2. Sampling frequency (Hz)

MPEG1	MPEG2	MPEG2.5	WMA	WAV
44100	22050	11025	32000	44100
48000	24000	12000	44100	48000
32000	16000	8000	48000

• The sound quality of MP3/WMA compressed and WAV files may vary depending on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate can have better sound quality.)
• The product only recognizes files with the MP3, WMA or WAV extension. Files without one of these extensions are not recognized.

3. Number of recognizable folders and files

• Folders: 2,000 for USB
• Files: 6,000 for USB
• No recognition limit for folder hierarchies.

4. Character display range (Unicode)

• Filenames: Up to 64 English characters (64 Korean characters)
• Foldernames: Up to 32 English characters (32 Korean characters)

Languages supported (Unicode support)

• Korean: 2,604 characters
• English: 94 characters
• Common Chinese characters: 4,888 characters
• Special symbols: 986 characters

NOTICE

Japanese/Simplified Chinese characters are not supported.

i Information

- Using the USB Devices

• Starting the vehicle while a USB device is connected can damage the device. Please disconnect USB devices before starting the vehicle.
• Starting the vehicle or stopping the engine while an external USB device is connected can result in failure of the external USB device to operate.
• Be cautious of static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external USB devices.
• An encrypted MP3 player is not recognized when connected as an external device.
• External USB devices may not be recognized, depending on the state of the external USB device.
• Only products with byte/sectors formatted at 4 KB or lower are recognized.
• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32 format are recognized; NTFS and ExFAT file systems are not recognized.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB devices are not recognized due to compatibility issues.
• Do not touch the USB connections.
• Connecting and disconnecting USB devices rapidly over a short period of time can cause equipment failure.
• Abnormal sounds may be audible when the USB device is disconnected.
• Turn the audio off before connecting or disconnecting external USB devices.
• Recognition may take longer depending on the type, capacity or file format of the external USB device. This is not a product malfunction.
• Use of USB devices for purposes other than playing music files is prohibited.
  • Image display and video playback are not supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Use of USB accessories, including charge and heat though the USB I/F, can lead to reduced product performance or malfunctions. Do not use USB devices or accessories for these purposes.
• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and extension cables can result in the vehicle's audio system failing to recognize your USB device. Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia port of your vehicle.
• When using high-capacity USB devices with logical drive divisions, only files saved on the highest level logical drive can be played. If applications are loaded on a USB drive, file playback may fail.
• Some MP3 players, cell phones, digital cameras, etc. (USB devices that are not recognized as mobile storage) may not operate normally when connected.
• USB charging may not be supported by some mobile devices.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Operation is guaranteed only for standard (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory drives.
• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and memory stick devices is not guaranteed.
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be played.
• SD-type USB memory, CF-type USB memory, and other USB memory devices that require adapters for connection are not supported.
• Proper operation of USB HDDs or USB drives with connectors that loosen due to vehicle vibrations is not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
• USB products that are used as key chains or cell phone accessories may damage the USB jack and affect proper file playback. Please refrain from use. Use only products with plug connectors, as shown in the following illustration.
• When MP3 devices or cell phones are connected simultaneously through AUX, BT Audio and USB modes, a popping noise or malfunction may occur.

USB

USB 12:00 AM 5 No Artist Information music1234567891011... No Album Information 6 7 0:19 Repeat Shuffle List Menu

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat play.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Select to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [USB].

- Connect a USB drive to the USB port to automatically play files on the USB drive.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

- Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

- Search songs by turning TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play.

USB 12:00 AM List 1/2 Files Artists Songs Albums

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable 'Repeat all', 'Repeat current song', 'Repeat folder' or 'Repeat category' play.

• beat all: All songs in the playlist are repeated.
  • Great current song: The currently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat folder: All songs in the current folder are repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all songs in the current category.

i Information

The repeat folder function is available only when songs are playing from the [File] category under [List].

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable 'Shuffle', 'Shuffle folder' or 'Shuffle category' play.

• Saddle: Songs are played in random order.
• Fiddle folder: Songs within the current folder are played in random order.
• Sfcfle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

USB 12:00 AM Save to My Music 1/2 music123456789101112131415... music_01.mp3 music_02.mp3 Mark All Unmark All Save

- Save to My Music*: Songs on your USB device can be saved to My Music.

(1) File: Select a file to save.
(2) Mark All: Select all files.
(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

* : if equipped

(4) Save: Save the selected file(s).

• Select the files you want to save, and select [Save]. This saves the selected files to My Music.
• If phone calls are received or made while saving, saving will be canceled.
• Up to 6,000 files can be saved.
• The currently playing file on the USB device cannot be changed while saving.
• My Music cannot be used while saving.
• Up to 700 MB can be saved.
  • Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

i Information

- Using the iPod® Devices

• To use the audio system's iPod® control function, use the dedicated cable provided with your iPod®.
• Connecting the iPod ^ to the vehicle during play may result in a loud noise that lasts about one to two seconds. Connect the iPod ^ to the vehicle after stopping or pausing play.
• Connect the iPod ^® with the vehicle in the ACC ON state to begin charging.
• When connecting the iPod® cable, be sure to fully push the cable into the port.
• When EQ effects are enabled simultaneously on external devices, such as iPod ^ s and the audio system, the EQ effects may overlap, causing sound quality deterioration or distortion. Deactivate the EQ function for all external devices, if possible.
• Noise may occur when your iPod® or the AUX port is connected. Disconnect and store separately when not in use.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• There may be noise if the audio system is used with an iPod ^ or AUX external device connected to the power jack. In these cases, disconnect the iPod ^ or external device from the power jack.
• Play may be interrupted, or device malfunctions may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®/iPad®.
• Play may fail if your iPhone ^ is connected through both Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology and USB. In this case, select Dock connector or Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology on your iPhone ^ to change the sound output settings.
• If your software version does not support the communication protocol or your iPod® is not recognized due to device failure, anomalies or defects, iPod® mode cannot be used.
• iPod ^ nano (5th generation) devices may not be recognized if the battery is low. Charge sufficiently before use. (Continued)

(Continued)

• The search and song play order in the iPod® device may be different from the search order in the audio system.
• If the iPod® has failed due to an internal defect, please reset the iPod® (consult your iPod® manual).
• Depending on the software version, the iPod® may fail to sync with the system. If the media is removed or disconnected before recognition, the previous mode may not be restored (iPad® cannot be charged).
• Cables other than the 1-meter cable provided with iPod®/iPhone®/iPad® products may not be recognized.
• When other music apps are used on your iPod ^® , the system sync function may fail due to malfunction of the iPod ^® application.

iPod®

iPod 12:00 AM Unknown Artist Music_1.mp3 Unknown Album Repeat Shuffle List Menu

(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat play.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Select to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Connect your iPod® to the audio USB port, press the [MEDIA] button, and select [iPod].

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable 'Repeat category', 'Repeat current song' play.

• Repeat category: Repeat all songs in the current category.
  • eat current song: The currently playing song is repeated.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable 'Shuffle category' play.
- Snuffle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

• Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

When other music programs are running

iPod 12:00AM Artist Name Title Name Album Name Supported controls are shown. 1 2 3 Play iPod Files Sound Settings

When songs saved on your iPod® are playing through a separate music app, the above screen is displayed.

(1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music
(2) Play iPod Files: Play music saved on your iPod®.
(3) Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.
(4) Album Image: View playback info

Playing iPod files

Select [Play iPod Files] to play songs saved on your iPod®.

If there are no songs saved on your iPod®, the [Play iPod Files] is disabled.

i Information

Operation cannot be carried out correctly due to iPod® application malfunction.

i Information

- Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology(BT) Audio (if equipped)

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode can only be used if a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology-enabled phone is connected. Only devices that support Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio can be used.
• If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology-enabled phone is disconnected during play, the music stops.
• When the TRACK UP/DOWN buttons are used during Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming, a popping noise or sound interruptions may occur, depending on the cell phone device.
• Depending on the cell phone model, the audio streaming function may not be supported.
• If a phone call is made or received when music is playing in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode, the call may mix with the music.
• When returning to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, play might not resume automatically for some cell phone models.

NOTICE

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the car audio system with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology, carefully read the contents of this user's manual.
• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device excessively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents.
• When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (BT) Audio (if equipped)

BT Audio 12:00 AM Give the wings No artist information No title information Streaming Repeat Shuffle Menu

(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat play.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(4) Play/Pause
Pause or play music.

i Information

• Some cell phone models may not support particular functions.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio volume is synced with cell phone media volume.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [BT Audio].

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

i Information

Some cell phones may not support this function.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable 'Repeat all', 'Repeat current song' or 'Repeat category' play.

• eat all: All songs in the playlist are repeated.
• Repeat current song: The currently playing song is repeated.
• eat category: Repeat all songs in the current category.

i Information

The repeat play function is engaged, depending on the operation of the connected Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology device.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable 'Shuffle', 'Shuffle category' play.

• Saddle: Songs are played in random order.
• Sfc file category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

i Information

The shuffle function is engaged, depending on the operation of the connected Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology device.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

• Connections: The currently connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device can be changed.
  • Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

AUX

Running AUX

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [AUX].

AUX 12:00 AM AUX Cable Connected. Sound Settings

Connect the external device connection jack to the AUX terminal to run AUX.

(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

My Music (if equipped)

My Music 12:00 AM 5 No Artist Information Music 1.mp3 No Album Information 6 7 0.02 1 Repeat Shuffle List Menu

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat play.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Select to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [My Music].

- My Music cannot be selected if it does not contain music.

- Check the content of your USB drive before saving music to My Music.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play.

My Music 12:00 AM List 1/2 File Playlist Artists Songs

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable 'Repeat all', 'Repeat current song' or 'Repeat category' play.

• Repeat all: All songs in the playlist are repeated.
  • Great current song: The currently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all songs in the current category.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable 'Shuffle' or 'Shuffle category' play.

• Saddle: Songs are played in random order.
• Sfc file category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

My Music 12:00 AM Delete Files 2/6 Music 2.mp3 Music 3.mp3 Music 3[001].mp3 Mark All Unmark All Delete

- Delete Files: You can delete files from My Music.

(1) File: Select saved file.
(2) Mark All: Select all files.
(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

(4) Delete: Delete the selected file(s).

• Select the file to delete, then select [Delete] to delete it.
• If phone calls are received or made during delete, delete will be canceled.

- Add to Playlist: Frequently played songs can be paired in a [Playlist].

- Songs can be played from the [Playlist].

• Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.
- Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

Delete from Playlist

When a song in the playlist is playing, select [Menu] and select [Delete from Playlist].

Select the song to delete, then select [Delete].

Phone (if equipped)

i Information

- Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology(BT) Cellular Phone

- Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology is a near-field wireless networking technology that uses the 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance wirelessly.

- The technology is used in PCs, peripherals, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phones, tablet PCs, household appliances and automobiles. Devices supporting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology can exchange data at high speeds without physical cable connections.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree devices enable convenient access to phone functions through cell phones equipped with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

- Some Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology devices may not be supported by the Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology Handsfree function.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology is connected and calls are attempted through a connected cell phone from outside the vehicle, the call is connected through the Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology Handsfree function of the vehicle.
• Please be sure to disconnect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree function through your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device or the audio screen.
• See https://www.hyundaiusa.com/BlueTooth/for a list of supported Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices.

Safety precautions

- The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree function helps drivers to drive safely. By connecting a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology-enabled phone to the vehicle's audio system, phone calls can be made and received through the audio system and contacts can be managed. Consult the user manual before use.

• Excessive manipulation of controls while driving, making it difficult to pay attention to the road ahead, can lead to accidents. Do not operate the device excessively while driving.
• Looking at the screen for a prolonged time increases the risk of accidents. Keep time spent looking at the screen to a minimum.

Precautions when connecting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices

- The vehicle supports the following Bluetooth® Wireless Technology functions. Some Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices may not support some functions.

1) Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree phone calls
2) Operations during a call (Private, Switch, Out Vol. controls)
3) Download call history saved to the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device
4) Download contacts saved to the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device

5) Automatic contacts/call history download when Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is connected
6) Automatic Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connection when the vehicle is started
7) Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming playback
- Before connecting the audio system to your device, make sure your device supports Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
- Even if your device supports Bluetooth® Wireless Technology, a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection cannot be established if the device's Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function is switched off. Search and connect with the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function enabled.
- Pair or connect Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices to the audio system with the vehicle at a standstill.

• If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection is lost due to abnormal conditions while a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected (communication range exceeded, device power OFF, communication errors, etc.), the disconnected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is searched for and automatically reconnected.
• If you want to disable the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto-connect function, turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function OFF on your device. Consult the user manuals for individual devices to see whether Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is supported.
• Handsfree call quality and volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
• Some Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are subject to intermittent Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection failures. In this case, use the following method.

1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function off on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device → Turn it on and try again.
2) Delete the paired device from both the audio system and Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, then pair again.
3) Power down your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device → Turn it on and try again.
4) Completely remove the battery from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device; reinsert it, reboot, and attempt connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reattempt connection.

i Information

Maximum power output of Bluetooth is 3mW.

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device

Information on pairing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices

• Pairing refers to the process of pairing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology cell phones or devices with the system prior to connection. This is a necessary procedure for Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection and usage.
• Up to five devices can be paired.
• Pairing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is not allowed while vehicle is moving.

Pairing the first Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control → Search for the vehicle from the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, and pair → Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device or approve passkey → Bluetooth® Wireless Technology pairing completed.

1. When the [PHONE] button on the audio or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control is pressed, the following screen is displayed. Devices can now be paired.

Setup 12:00 AM Add New Device ① Vehicle Name: Name ② Settings Bluetooth Scan Vehicle Name In the Bluetooth device, search for the Vehicle Name and pair. Cancel

(1) Vehicle name: Searched name in Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.

i Information

The vehicle name in the image above is an example. Refer to your device for the actual name of your device.

1. Search for available Bluetooth® devices in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology menu of your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (cell phone, etc.).
2. Confirm that the vehicle name in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device matches the vehicle name shown on the audio screen, then select it.
   4-1. For devices that require passkey entry, a passkey entry screen is shown on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
3. Enter the passkey '0000', in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
   4-2. For devices that require passkey confirmation, the following screen is shown on the audio system. A 6-digit passkey input screen is shown in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.

Setup 12:00 AM Add New Device Passkey: 680276 Please check the passkey on your Bluetooth device and confirm. Cancel

- After confirming that the 6-digit passkey on the audio screen and the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device are identical, select [OK] in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.

i Information

The 6-digit passkey in the image above is an example. Refer to your vehicle for the actual passkey.

Pairing a second Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system → Select [Bluetooth] → Select [Connections] → Select [Add New].

Setup 12:00 AM Connections Bluetooth Phone Bluetooth Phone Add New Delete

- The pairing procedure from this point is identical to [Pairing the first Bluetooth device].

i Information

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology standby mode lasts for three minutes. If a device is not paired within three minutes, pairing is canceled. Start over from the beginning.
• For most Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology devices, a connection is established automatically after pairing. Some devices, however, require separate confirmation when connecting after pairing. Be sure to check your Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology device after pairing to confirm that it has connected.

Connecting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices

If there are no connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control → List of paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices → Select the desired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices from the list → Connect Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Phone 12:00 AM Connections Bluetooth Phone Bluetooth Phone Add New Delete

If there are connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system → Select [Settings] → Select [Connections] → Select Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device to connect → Select [Connect] → Connect Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

Setup 12:00 AM Bluetooth Phone Handsfree Calling Audio Streaming Contacts Download Audio Control Connect Delete

i Information

• Only one Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.
• When a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, other devices cannot be paired.

Accepting/rejecting phone calls

Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connected.

FM 12:00 AM Incoming Call... ① John Smith ② 012-345-6789 ③ Accept ④ Reject

(1) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.
(3) Accept: Accept call.
(4) Reject: Reject call.

i Information

• When the incoming call screen is displayed, audio mode and the settings screen cannot be shown. Only call volume control is supported.
• Some Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology devices may not support the call reject function.
• Some Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology devices may not support the phone number display function.

Operation during calls

Incoming call with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connected → Select [Accept].

Phone 12:00 AM 0:03 ① ② John Smith ③ 012-345-6789 ④ Keypad ⑤ Private ⑥ Out Vol. ⑦ End

(1) Call duration: Call duration display.
(2) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.
(4) Keypad: Number keypad for Automatic Response Service input is displayed.
(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell phone.
(6) Outgoing Volume: Adjust outgoing voice volume.
(7) End: End call.

i Information

• Some Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology devices may not support the Private function.
• The outgoing voice volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. If the outgoing voice volume is too high or low, adjust the Microphone Outgoing Volume.

Favorites

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system → Select [Favorites] → Favorites list displayed.

Phone 12:00 AM Favorites (4) 1/2 ① John Smith Scott Davis Mary Jones Add to Favorites Delete

(1) Favorites list: A list of paired favorite is displayed.
Connect a call when selected.
(2) Add to Favorites: Add a downloaded phone number to favorites.
(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorite.

i Information

• Up to 20 favorites can be saved for each connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
• Favorites can be accessed when the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device they were paired from is connected.
• The audio system does not download favorites from Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices. Favorites must be newly saved before use.
  • To add to favorites, contacts must be downloaded first.
• Saved favorites are not updated even if the contacts of the connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device are changed. In this case, favorites need to be deleted and added again.

Call History

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system → Select [Call History] → Call history is displayed.

Phone 12:00 AM All Calls (124) 1/42 John Smith 12:08 PM Scott Davis 12:07 PM 012-345-6789 Dec. 10 Sort by Download

(1) Call History: Display the down-loaded call history list. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Sort by: Sort by All Calls, Dialed Calls, Received Calls or Missed Calls.
(3) Download: Download call history from connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices.

i Information

• Up to 50 dialed, received and missed calls are saved.
• When the latest call history is received, the existing call history is deleted.

Contacts

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system → Select [Contacts] → Select letter (ABC) → Contacts displayed.

Phone 12:00 AM Contacts (485) 147/162 John Smith Scott Davis Mary Jones Download

(1) Contacts: Display downloaded contacts. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Download: Download contacts from connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices.

i Information

• Only supported contacts format can be downloaded and displayed from the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, contacts from some applications will not be included.
• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.
• In some cases, additional confirmation from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is necessary when downloading contacts. If downloading of contacts unsuccessful, consult your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device's settings or the audio screen to approve the download.
• Contacts without phone numbers are not displayed.

Dial

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Dial].

Phone 12:00 AM Enter the phone number ① Bluetooth Phone Call ③ 1 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9WXYZ ★ 0 + #

(1) Phone number entry window: The phone number entered using the keypad is displayed.
(2) Clear

- Select to delete individual digits.

- Press and hold to delete the entire phone number.

(3) Keypad: Enter phone number.
(4) Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Phone name

• The name of the connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is displayed.
• Contacts matching the keypad number/letter input are displayed.

(5) Call

• Enter and select a phone number to call.
• Select without entering a phone number to see the most recent dialed call.

Connections

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system → Select [Connections].

- For connections setting, refer to Setup → Select [Bluetooth] → Select [Connections] page.

Settings

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system → Select [Settings].
- For more details, refer to Setup → Bluetooth page.

Setup

Setup 12:00 AM Display Sound Date/Time Bluetooth System Screen Saver Display Off

Access Display, Sound, Date/Time, Bluetooth*, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system.

* if equipped

Display

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display].

• Mode: Brightness is automatically adjusted according to the headlight use.
• Illumination: The brightness of the audio screen can be changed.

Sound

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Sound].

• Position: Sound balance and fader can be adjusted.
• Tone: Sound tone color can be adjusted.
• Back-up Warning Priority: Automatically lower audio volume while reversing.

• Speed Dependent Volume: Automatically adjust volume based on vehicle speed.
- Beep: Select whether to play a beep sound when the screen is touched.

Date/Time

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system → Select [Date/Time].

• Set Time: Set the time displayed on the audio screen.
• Time Format: Choose between 12-hour and 24-hour time formats.
• Set Date: Set the date displayed on the audio screen.

WARNING

Date/Time Setting Distraction

Adjusting the date/time setting while driving can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death.

Bluetooth (if equipped)

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth].

• Connections: Control pairing, deletion, connection and disconnection of Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices.
• Auto Connection Priority: Set the connection priority of Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices when the vehicle is started.
• Download Contacts: Contacts can be downloaded from connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices.
• Bluetooth Voice Prompts: Play or mute voice prompts for Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device pairing, connection and errors.

i Information

• When paired devices are deleted, the call history and contacts of the device saved to the audio system are deleted.
• For Bluetooth/Wireless Technology connections with low connection priority, some time may be required for the connection to be established.
• Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
• If no Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is connected, the Download Contacts button is disabled.

System

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system → Select [System].

• Memory Information: View My Music memory usage.
- Language: Change the user language.
- System Information: At the System Information screen, Software version information, updates are available.

- System Update: At the System Information screen, insert the USB memory with the latest file downloaded, and then select the [Update] to begin updating. The system with then reboot automatically. (if equipped)

i Information

• This product needs supplemented software updates and additional functions, which collectively may take some time to complete, depending on the amount of data.
• If the Power is disconnected or the USB is removed during an update, the data might be damaged. Please wait until the update is complete while engine is on.

Screen Saver

Set the information displayed when the audio system is switched off or the screen is turned off.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system → Select [Screen Saver].

• Analog: An analog clock is displayed.
  • Digital: A digital clock is displayed.
• None: No information is displayed.

Display Off

To prevent glare, the screen can be turned off with the audio system in operation.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system → Select [Display Off].

i Information

Use ‘Screen Saver’ to set the information to be displayed when the screen is turned off.

FCC Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving....5-3

Before Entering the Vehicle....5-3

Before Starting 5-3

Ignition switch 5-5

Key Ignition Switch 5-5

Engine Start/Stop Button....5-8

Manual transmission....5-15

Manual Transmission Operation....5-15

Good Driving Practices 5-17

Smartstream intelligent variable transmission

(Smartstream IVT) 5-18

Smartstream Intelligent Variable Transmission (Smartstream IVT) Operation....5-18

Good Driving Practices 5-23

Braking system....5-24

Power Brakes....5-24

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator 5-25

Parking Brake....5-25

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 5-27

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)....5-28

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)....5-31

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) 5-32

Good Braking Practices....5-33

Drive mode integrated control system .....5-34

Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)

- Radar Type 5-35

System Setting and Activation....5-35

FCA Warning Message and System Control .....5-37

FCA Sensor 5-39

System Malfunction 5-40

Limitations of the System....5-42

Cruise control (CC) 5-46

Cruise Control operation 5-46

Special driving conditions....5-51

Hazardous Driving Conditions....5-51

Rocking the Vehicle....5-51

Smooth Cornering 5-52

Driving at Night....5-52

Driving in the Rain 5-52

Driving in Flooded Areas....5-53

Highway Driving....5-53

Winter driving....5-54

Snow or Icy Conditions....5-54

Winter Precautions....5-56

Vehicle load limit....5-58

Tire Loading Information Label 5-59

Trailer Towing....5-63

WARNING

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the trunk open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit harmful chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

BEFORE DRIVING

Before Entering the Vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Before Starting

• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and the doors are securely closed and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt. All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.
  • Always drive defensively. Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each additional drink.

Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

(Continued)

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.

IGNITION SWITCH

Key Ignition Switch

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the ignition switch, or any other control, while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

ACC ON START LOCK

OAE056172L

Whenever the front door is opened, the ignition switch will illuminate, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed. (if equipped)

WARNING

NEVER turn the ignition switch to the LOCK or ACC position while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in 1 ^st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for intelligent variable transmission) position, apply the parking brake, and turn ignition switch to the LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

Key ignition switch positions

Switch Position	Action Notice
LOCK	To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put the key in at the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.(The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position for intelligent variable transmission)
ACC	Electrical accessories are usable.The steering wheel unlocks.
ON	This is the normal key position when the engine has started.All features and accessories are usable.The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition switch from ACC to ON.	Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running in order to prevent the battery from discharging.
START	To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position. The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.	The engine will crank until you release the key.

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.
- Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.
- Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

i Information

Depress the brake pedal and clutch pedal until the engine starts.

Vehicle with intelligent variable transmission (IVT):

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. Hold the key (maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

i Information

• It is best to maintain a moderate engine speed until the vehicle engine comes up to normal operating temperature. Avoid harsh or abrupt acceleration or deceleration while the engine is still cold.
• Whether the engine is cold or warm, always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not rev the engine while warming it up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in the START position for more than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10 seconds before trying again.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

Engine Start/Stop Button

Close-up of a car's front wheel with a 'ENGINE START STOP' button (no additional text or symbols visible)

Whenever the front door is opened, the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed.

WARNING

To reduce risk of serious injury or death, NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the Engine Start/Stop button or related parts. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an emergency:

Press and hold the Engine Start/Stop button for more than two seconds OR rapidly press and release the Engine Start/Stop button three times (within three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

- NEVER press the Engine Start/Stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems.

(Continued)

(Continued)

This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.
• NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the Engine Start/Stop button or any other control while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Engine Start/Stop button positions

- Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position Action Notice
OFF	To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and then press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Not illuminated
ACC	Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal.Electrical accessories are usable.	If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.
Orange indicator

• Vehicle with manual transmission

Button Position Action Notice
ON	Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch pedal.The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.	If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.
Blue indicator
START	To start the engine, depress the clutch and brake pedals and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.	If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
Not illuminated

Engine Start/Stop button positions

- Vehicle with intelligent variable transmission (IVT)

Button Position Action Notice
OFF	To turn off the engine, press the Engine Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).When you press the Engine Start/Stop button without the shift lever in P (Park), the Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.
ACC	Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.Electrical accessories are usable.	If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.

• Vehicle with intelligent variable transmission (IVT)

Button Position Action Notice
ON	Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.	Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
START	To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N (Neutral) position.For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.	If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:OFF → ACC → ON → OFFHowever, the engine may start if you depress the brake pedal within 0.5 second after pressing the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF position.

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.
- Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.
- Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.

i Information

• The engine will start by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from the driver, the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when using the ACC position or if the vehicle engine is ON.

Vehicle with manual transmission:

1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

i Information

Depress the brake pedal and clutch pedal until the engine starts.

Vehicle with intelligent variable transmission (IVT):

1. Always carry the smart key with you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

i Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Aggressive accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)
  • Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not rev the engine while warming it up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:
- If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the Engine Start/Stop button in an attempt to restart the engine.

- Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle: When the stop lamp switch fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the engine by pressing and holding the Engine Start/Stop button for 10 seconds with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position.

Do not press the Engine Start/Stop button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp switch fuse is blown.

For your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.

Close-up of a car's front seat with a blue-lit switch, no visible text or symbols on the main subject.

i Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

3D model of a car seat component with numbered parts and a directional arrow diagram (no text or symbols)

The shift lever can be moved without pressing the button (1).

The button (1) must be pressed while moving the shift lever to R (Reverse).

OAD055004

Manual Transmission Operation

The manual transmission has 6 forward gears. The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

WARNING

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transmission is shifted into 1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R (Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.
• Do not use the engine brake (shifting from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

To shift to R (Reverse), make sure the vehicle has completely stopped, and then move the shift lever to neutral before moving into R (Reverse).

When you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear or R (Reverse):

1. Put the shift lever in neutral and release the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal, and then shift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear.

i Information

During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transmission lubricant has warmed up.

Using the clutch

The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way before:

• Starting the engine
  The engine will not start without depressing the clutch pedal.
• Shifting into gear, up shifting to the next higher gear, or down shifting to the next lower gear.

When releasing the clutch pedal, release it slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving.

To prevent unnecessary wear or damage to the clutch:

• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with the clutch on an incline, while waiting for the traffic light, etc.
  • Always depress the clutch pedal down fully to prevent noise or damage.
• Do not depress the clutch pedal again until it is fully released.
• Do not start with the 2^nd gear engaged except when you start on a slippery road.
• Do not drive with cargo loaded more than required loading capacity.

Downshifting

Down shift to a lower gear when slowing down in heavy traffic or driving up a steep hill to prevent high engine loads.

Also, downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and helps reaccelerate the vehicle when you need to increase your speed.

When the vehicle is going downhill, downshifting helps maintain safe speed by providing engine braking (brake power from the engine) and results in less wear on the brakes.

NOTICEN

To prevent damage to the engine, clutch and transmission:

- When downshifting from 5^th gear to 4^th gear, be careful not to inadvertently push the shift lever sideways engaging the 2^nd gear. A drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point the tachometer will enter the redzone and may cause engine damage.

- Do not downshift more than two gear at a time or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher).

Such down shifting may damage the engine, clutch and the transmission.

Good Driving Practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause the brakes and related parts to overheat and malfunction.
  When you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. Engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you shift into R (Reverse) to prevent damage to the transmission.

- Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident

WARNING

Do not use aggressive engine braking (shifting from a higher gear to a lower gear) on slippery roads. This could cause the tires to slip and may result in an accident.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

- ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
  • HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

SMARTSTREAM INTELLIGENT VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (SMARTSTREAM IVT) (IF EQUIPPED)

P R N D + - P R N D + -

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal, press this shift button, and then move shift lever.

Move shift lever.

OYC056006

Smartstream Intelligent Variable Transmission (Smartstream IVT) Operation

The Smartstream Intelligent Variable Transmission (Smartstream IVT) automatically shifts depending on speed, accelerate pedal position. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
- Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, then set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.
- When using Manual Shift Mode, use caution when shifting from a higher gear to a lower gear on slippery roads. This could cause the tires to slip and may result in an accident.

Transmission ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must depress firmly on the brake pedal and make sure your foot is off the accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot shift the lever out of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in this section.

The shift lever must be in P (Park) before turning the engine off.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
  • After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the shift lever is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the engine off.
• When parking on an incline, place the shift lever in P (Park) and apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill.
• For safety, always engage the parking brake with the shift lever in the P (Park) position except for the case of emergency parking.

i Information

The RPM (revolutions per minute) may increase or decrease when performing the IVT self-diagnosis.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart a stalled engine.

Shift into P (Park) if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N (Neutral) to another gear.

WARNING

Do not shift into gear unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shifting into gear when the engine is running at high speed can cause the vehicle to move very rapidly. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit people or objects.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position. The transmission will automatically shift, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill depress the accelerator pedal further until you feel the transmission downshift to a lower gear.

The DRIVE MODE switch, located on the shift lever console, allows the driver to switch from NORMAL mode to SPORT mode.

For more information, refer to "Drive Mode Integrated Control System" later in this chapter.

3D rendered image of a mechanical device with a transparent cylindrical component and a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

OYC056007

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, manual shift mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In Manual Shift mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions.

• (Up) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.
• (Down) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

i Information

• Only the eight forward gears can be selected in Manual Shift mode. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.
• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1^st gear is automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transmission will upshift automatically.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If the driver presses the lever to + (Up) or - (Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range. The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine rpms below the red zone.

- When accelerating from a stop on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the + (Up) position. This allows the transmission to shift into the 2^nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the - (Down) side to shift back to the 1^st gear.

- When driving in Manual Shift Mode, slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged if the engine rpms are outside of the allowable range.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock release

① P ① OHCA047400

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, and then do the following:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock release access hole.

4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-driver) into the access hole and press down on the tool.

5. Move the shift lever.

6. Remove the tool from the shift-lock override access hole then install the cap.

If you need to use the shift-lock release, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key with you when exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

• When you stay in the vehicle with the engine running, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. The engine or exhaust system may overheat and start a fire.
• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep away from the exhaust system components.
• Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry grass, paper or leaves. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Good Driving Practices

• Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
  Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N (Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident because of a loss of engine braking and the transmission could be damaged.

• While driving up or downhill, check the gear position, indicated on the cluster, to ensure the vehicle is driving forward while in D (Drive), or backward while in R (Reverse). If you drive in the opposite direction of the selected gear, the engine will turn off and a serious accident may occur due to the degraded brake performance.

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

• Depressing both accelerator and brake pedals at the same time can trigger logic for engine power reduction to assure vehicle deceleration. Vehicle acceleration will resume after the brake pedal is released.
• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

- Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt. In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
  • HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

BRAKING SYSTEM

Power Brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

- Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

- When descending down a long or steep hill, move the gear shift lever to Manual Shift Mode and manually downshift to a lower gear in order to control your speed without using the brake pedal excessively. Applying the brakes continuously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

i Information

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

Parking Brake

Interior view of a car gear shift lever (no text or symbols visible)

Always set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. To apply the parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Pull up the parking brake lever as far as possible.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

Interior view of a car showing a blue and gray vehicle belt with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

While pressing the release button (1), slightly pull up on the parking brake lever then lower the parking brake lever (2).

If the parking brake does not release or does not release all the way, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
  Vehicles with the parking brake not fully engaged are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.
• When parking on an incline, block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from rolling down.
• NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.
• Only release the parking brake when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator pedal while the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the parking brake engaged, warning will sound. Damage to the parking brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is off before driving.

Check the Parking Brake Warning Light by placing the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine).

This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light remains on after the parking brake is released while engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) or an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

ABS is an electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light (abs) on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, contact your HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light (AB) may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and turn the engine off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

i Information

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light (may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning. Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard, showing a close-up of the dashboard's side panel (no text or symbols visible)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle's brakes and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ESC and the ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds. After both lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.
• When the ESC activates, the engine may not respond to the accelerator as it does under routine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise Control automatically disengages. The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road conditions allow. See "Cruise Control System" later in this chapter. (if equipped)

• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, the engine RPM (revolutions per minute) may not increase even if you press the accelerator pedal deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and does not indicate a problem.

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction Control disabled" will illuminate. In this state, the traction

control function of ESC (engine management) is disabled, but the brake control function of ESC (braking management) still operates.

• State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 seconds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction & Stability Control disabled" illuminates and a

warning chime sounds. In this state, both the traction control function of ESC (engine management) and the brake control function of ESC (braking management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed to the LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

Indicator lights

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

When the ignition switch is placed to the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.

If ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off.

WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active: Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the ESC off while the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tires installed.

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC to maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the transmission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively while the ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

i Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or standard brake system operation.

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)

The Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) is a function of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tires can suddenly become uneven.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.
• Never drive too fast for the road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad weather, slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.

NOTICE

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as gradient or incline.
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering) warning light ( ! is on or blinks.

WARNING

If ESC indicator light (or EPS warning light) stays on or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the VSM system. When the warning light illuminates, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized tires and wheels installed.

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. The system operates the brakes automatically for approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake after 2 seconds or when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the accelerator pedal when starting off on a incline. The HAC activates only for approximately 2 seconds.

NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral)
- The HAC activates even though the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off but does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

Good Braking Practices

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the 1 ^st gear (for manual transmission vehicle) or P (Park, for intelligent variable transmission vehicle) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed. Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

If your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent variable transmission (IVT), don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (intelligent variable transmission). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling.

If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels. Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (intelligent variable transmission) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.

Then release the parking brake. Do not hold the vehicle on an incline with the accelerator pedal.

This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car showing the driver's seatbelt and gear shift (no text or symbols visible)

The drive mode may be selected according to the driver's preference or road condition.

The system resets to be in the NORMAL mode, when the engine is restarted.

i Information

If there is a problem with the instrument cluster, the drive mode will be in NORMAL mode and may not change to SPORT mode.

The mode changes, as below, whenever the DRIVE MODE button is pressed.

NORMAL mode

In NORMAL mode the engine and transmission control logic work together to provide regular daily driving performance with some fuel efficiency.

- When NORMAL mode is selected, it is not displayed on the instrument cluster.

SPORT mode

SPORT mode manages the driving dynamics by automatically adjusting the steering effort, and the

engine and transmission control logic for enhanced driving performance.

• When SPORT mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the SPORT indicator will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted, the Drive Mode will revert back to NORMAL mode. If SPORT mode is desired, re-select SPORT mode from the DRIVE MODE button.
• When SPORT mode is activated:
• The engine rpm will tend to remain raised over a certain length of time even after releasing the accelerator
• Upshifts are delayed when accelerating

i Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.

FORWARD COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST (FCA) - RADAR TYPE

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist is to help reduce or to avoid accident risk. It recognizes the distance from the vehicle ahead through the sensors (i.e. radar), and, if necessary, warns the driver or applies emergency braking.

* Radar type FCA does not recognize for pedestrians in front.

WARNING

Forward Collision-avoidance Assist is a supplemental system and is not a substitute for safe driving practices.

It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead to ensure it is safe to use FCA.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using Forward Collision-avoidance Assist :

• This system is only a supplemental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering.
  • Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. FCA does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

• The driver can activate FCA by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting:
  'User Settings →Driving Assist →Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)'

FCA deactivates, when the driver deselects the system setting.

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel FCA. The driver can monitor

FCA ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is turned off.

If the warning light remains ON when FCA is activated, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- The driver can select the initial warning activation time on the LCD display.

Go to the 'User Settings → Driving Assist → Forward Collision-avoidance Assist → Late/Normal/Early'.

The options for the initial Forward Collision-avoidance Assist includes the following:

- Early :

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision-avoidance Assist is activated earlier. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle ahead before the initial warning occurs.

If the 'Early' condition feels too sensitive, select 'Normal' condition.

Even though, 'Early' is selected if the front vehicle suddenly stops the initial warning activation time may not seem fast.

- Normal :

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision-avoidance Assist is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of distance between the vehicle ahead before the initial warning occurs.

- Late :

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision-avoidance Assist is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance between the vehicle ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Select 'Late' when traffic is light and when driving speed is slow.

Prerequisite for activation

FCA is on and ready when FCA is selected on the LCD display and when the following prerequisites are satisfied:

- ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is on.

- Driving speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). (FCA is only activated within a certain speed range.)

- When FCA recognizes a vehicle in front. (FCA may not recognize every obstacle or provide warnings and braking in every situation, so do not rely on FCA to stop the vehicle in instances where the driver sees an obstacle and has the ability to apply the brakes).

WARNING

• Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate /deactivate FCA.
• FCA automatically activates upon placing the ignition switch to the ON position. The driver can deactivate FCA by canceling the system setting on the LCD display.
• FCA automatically deactivates upon canceling ESC (Electronic Stability Control). When ESC is canceled, FCA cannot be activated on the LCD display. In this case, the FCA warning light will illuminate, but it does not indicate a malfunction.

FCA Warning Message and System Control

FCA produces warning messages, warning alarms, and emergency braking based on the level of risk of a frontal collision, such as when a vehicle ahead suddenly brakes, when there is no following distance from the vehicle in front.

Collision Warning (1 ^st warning)

Collision Warning

OHCA057029

This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Collision Warning ( 2^nd warning)

Collision Warning

OHCA057029

• The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning alarms.

• The vehicle will reduce its speed to a certain limit.

• The brake activates gradually for vehicles ahead.

• The brake control activates within an arranged limit to ease the impact from a collision.

Emergency Braking (3rd warning)

Emergency Braking

OHCA057030

• The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning alarms.
• The vehicle will reduce its speed to a certain limit.

- The brake control activates within an arranged limit to ease the impact from a collision. Maximum brake control is activated just before the collision.

Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driver's depressing the brake pedal.
  • FCA provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.
• FCA braking control is automatically canceled when risk factors disappear.

CAUTION

The driver should always use extreme caution while operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from FCA.

WARNING

FCA braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver is responsible for driving safely and controlling the vehicle.

WARNING

FCA logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of FCA.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive dangerously to activate the system.

FCA Sensor

Front view of a white car with a digital grille and logo, no visible text or symbols on the body.

In order for FCA to operate properly, always make sure the sensor cover or sensor is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the sensor cover or sensor may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.

NOTICE

• Do not apply a license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard or number plate molding near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.
  • Always keep the radar sensor and cover clean and free of dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, FCA may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, FCA may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.
• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may make it difficult to hear FCA warning sounds.

Warning message and warning light

Forward Collision Avoidance Assist (FCA) system disabled. Radar blocked

OOS057080L

Forward Collision Avoidance Assist (FCA) disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, FCA operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor cover before operating FCA. The system will operate normally when such foreign substance is removed.

FCA may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the engine.

System Malfunction

Check Forward Collision Avoidance Assist system

OOS057081L

Check Forward Collision Avoidance Assist

• When FCA is not working properly, FCA warning light ( will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light ( will illuminate. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• FCA warning message may appear along with the illumination of ESC (Electronic Stability Control) warning light.

WARNING

• FCA is only a supplemental system for the driver's convenience. The driver is responsible for controlling the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on FCA. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.
• In certain instances and under certain driving conditions, FCA may activate prematurely. This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor may not detect the vehicle ahead. FCA may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If there is a malfunction with FCA, the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist is not applied even though the braking system is operating normally.
• If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system. Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
  • FCA may activate during braking and the vehicle may stop suddenly shifting loose objects toward the passengers. Always keep loose objects secured.
  • FCA may not activate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a collision.
• The brake control may not work, possibly causing a collision, if a vehicle in front abruptly stops. Always pay extreme caution.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Occupants may get injured, if the vehicle abruptly stops by the activated FCA. Pay extreme caution.

WARNING

• FCA operates only to detect vehicles in front of the vehicle.
• FCA does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.
• FCA is not designed to detect other objects on the road.
• FCA does not detect vehicles in the opposite lane.
• FCA does not detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.
• FCA cannot detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead end street.)
In these cases, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Limitations of the System

FCA is designed to monitor the vehicle ahead on the roadway through radar signals to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

In certain situations, the radar sensor may not be able to detect the vehicle ahead. In these cases, FCA may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where FCA operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor is blocked with a foreign object or debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor
• There is interference by electromagnetic waves
  • There is severe irregular reflection from the radar sensor
  • The radar sensor recognition is limited
• The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motorcycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)

• The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances as a construction zone, railroad, etc.
  • The vehicle in front is driving erratically

• The vehicle drives through a construction area, on an unpaved road, or above metal materials, such as a railway

• The vehicle drives inside a building, such as a basement parking lot
• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving
• The vehicle in front is moving vertically to the driving direction
  • The vehicle in front is stopped vertically
  • The vehicle in front is driving towards your vehicle or reversing
  • The sensor recognition changes suddenly when passing over a speed bump
  • The vehicle is under heavy vibration
  • The vehicle is on roundabouts.
• The radar or sensor cover is broken
  • The vehicle is passing a tunnel, toll gate or partially paved road
• The radar or camera sensor recognition is under other limited circumstances

- Driving on a curve

The performance of Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist may be limited when driving on a curved road.

Diagram of two cars driving on a curved road with a blue triangular overlay, no text or symbols present

The front radar sensor recognition system may not detect the vehicle traveling in front on a curved road. This may result in no alarm and braking when necessary.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Top-down view of a car driving on a curved road with visible lane markings (no text or symbols)

The front radar sensor recognition system may not detect the vehicle traveling in front on a curved road.

This may result in no alarm and braking when necessary.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Two cars on a curved surface with a blue triangular arrow pointing toward them, no visible text or symbols

OHCA069038 OAE056103 OAE056109

E056103 OAE056109

- Driving on a slope

The performance of Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist may be decreased while driving upward or downward on a slope. The front radar sensor recognition system may not detect the vehicle in front. This may result in unnecessary alarm and braking or no alarm and braking when necessary. When the system suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration. Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, FCA may not immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, FCA may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Two illustrations of a truck spraying water onto a car, showing airflow and exhaust (no text or symbols)

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required. FCA may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

i Information

In some instances, FCA may be canceled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.

i Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

- Do not use Forward Collision-avoidance Assist when towing a vehicle. Application of FCA while towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.
• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist may operate when an object, which has similar shape or characteristic to a vehicle, is detected.
  • FCA is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead in the roadway through radar signals. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as luggage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.
• Never try to test the operation of FCA. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.
• When you replace or reinstall the front bumper or radar, we recommend that you take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

CRUISE CONTROL (CC)

Cruise Control operation

① CRUISE ② SET OHCI057021

1. Cruise indicator
2. SET indicator

Cruise Control allows you to drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) without depressing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit.
- If Cruise Control is left on, (cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally. Keep Cruise Control off (cruise indicator light OFF) when Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
- Use Cruise Control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
- Do not use Cruise Control when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Do not use when:

• Driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed
• Driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads
• Driving on hilly or windy roads
• Driving in windy areas
• Driving with limited view (possibly due to bad weather such as fog, snow, rain and sandstorm)

NOTICE

During cruise-speed driving of a manual transmission vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or press the cruise control ON / OFF button.

i Information

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
• Before activating cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the ignition or starting the engine.

To set Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted control panel showing a blue 'NEW' button (no text or symbols on the main body)

1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise indicator will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Information - Manual transmission

For manual transmission vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set cruise control after starting the engine.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

1. Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it. The SET indicator light will illuminate.
2. Release the accelerator pedal.

i Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, while driving uphill or downhill.

To increase Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up of the dashboard panel showing a blue control knob (no text or symbols visible)

OHCM057025 OHCM057024

- Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and hold it, while monitoring the SET speed on the instrument cluster.

Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.

- Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

- Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up of the dashboard panel showing a blue control switch (no text or symbols visible)

- Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.

- Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

- Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

To temporarily accelerate with Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down (SET-) at the increased speed, Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.

Cruise Control will be canceled when:

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a highlighted GACDEL component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Depressing the clutch pedal. (for manual transmission vehicle)
- Pressing the CANCEL button located on the steering wheel.
- Pressing the CRUISE button. Both the cruise indicator and the "SET" indicator will turn OFF.
- Moving the shift lever into N (Neutral). (for intelligent variable transmission)
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is operating.
- Downshifting to the 2nd gear in manual shift mode. (for intelligent variable transmission)

i Information

Each of the above actions will cancel Cruise Control operation (the "SET" indicator in the instrument cluster will go off), but only pressing the CRUISE button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the CRUISE button.

To resume preset Cruising speed

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a close-up inset showing the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

• Press the CRUISE button (the cruise indicator light will go off).
• Turn the vehicle OFF.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous Driving Conditions

When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the below suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional traction while the vehicle becomes stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING

Downshifting with an intelligent variable transmission (IVT) while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

Rocking the Vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tires can increase very quickly. If the tires become damaged, a tire blow out or tire explosion can occur. This condition is dangerous - you and others may be injured. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tires or the engine. DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).

i Information

The ESC system must be turned OFF before rocking the vehicle.

NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the transmission, and tire damage. See "Towing" in chapter 6.

Smooth Cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at Night

Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's head-lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-lamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the Rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control.
• Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.
• Tires should be properly maintained with at least 2/32nds of an inch of tread depth. If your tires do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

• Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

• If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Driving in Flooded Areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Highway Driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified. Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged tires, which may reduce traction or adversely affect vehicle handling. This could lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

i Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

Driving at higher speeds on the highway consumes more fuel and is less efficient than driving at a slower, more moderate speed. Maintain a moderate speed in order to conserve fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine coolant level and the engine oil before driving.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.

WARNING

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure all passengers are wearing their seat belts.

WINTER DRIVING

The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tires and cause other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or Icy Conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause the vehicle to skid.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

WARNING

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle's handling in all weather conditions. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

i Information

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Tire chains

Close-up of a car tire wrapped in mesh material, showing wheel rim and alloy ring (no text or symbols)

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner than other types of tires, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; if unavoidable use a wire type chain. If tire chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

WARNING

The use of tire chains may adversely affect vehicle handling:

• Drive less than 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.

! CAUTION

If your vehicle has 205/45 R17 size tires do not use tire chain; they can damage your vehicle (wheel, suspension and body).

i Information

• Install tire chains on both left and right front tires. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tires will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.
- Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Chain installation

When installing tire chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly possible. Drive slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tire chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available). Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

NOTICE

• When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3\~0.6 miles (0.5\~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels. If unavoidable, use a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.47 inch (12 mm) wide to prevent damage to the chain's connection.

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in chapter 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See chapter 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in chapter 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a service station.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in chapter 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Do not let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in P and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Don't place foreign objects or materials in the engine compartment

Placement of foreign object or materials which prevent cooling of the engine, in the engine compartment, may cause a failure or combustion. The manufacturer is not responsible for the damage caused by such placement.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Two labels on your driver's door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tire and Loading Information Label and the Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the driver's door sill.

Tire Loading Information Label

■ Type A

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSECHNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT STANDING ITEMS ITEMS OF PLACES TOTAL 5 INLET 2 PER INSTRUMENTS FOR THE WEIGHT OF CONCRETE AND CABLE SHEET OVER CHARGED LE PINE LINE DES DOCUMENTS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEE: GABRIEL'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION WITH LE MANNER DE L'USHER POUR PLUS DE RENEUR CHEMISTRY

■ Type C

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENEJMENDMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT EARTING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE FLORES RUMS FROM 1 RER AVAIL 2 RIVER 3 THE CABBAGE WEIGHT OF CAPACITY AND CABLE SHOULD BEANS SHEET IN THE TOTAL DREAM COUPANTS DU CHARGE DE LA CHARGE FIRE PINE IN DIMENSIONS CAPTURES PINE DES FLORES CAPTURES SECRETE PINEES ANNUAL FOR ACCUMULATION INFORMATION VEGETABLE NAME OF DELETTUCE POUR PLUGATIONS BEANS DE BEANS DE BEANS DE BEANS DE BEANS DE BEANS DE BEANS DE BEANS DE

■ Type B

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RONSEIGNMENTS SUR LES PINES ET LE CHARGOMENT SEATING DIRECTLY RÉDRE DE PLACES 10/15 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

■ Type D

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGOEMT SENTING DIRECTLY MORE DE PLUGES MIN 5 FROM AVAIL 2 BEAM REACH 3 FOR ONE NO. NO. OF (AQUINATE AND LARGE) NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. LE DISE DU TOTAL DES VARGOS ET LA CHARGOEMT IN THE CHARGOEMT 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS SE GARDEN'S MINUAL FOR RENTION INFORMATION OUT LE MINUEL DE L'ULAGUE POUR PLUGE DE RENSEIGNEMENTS 100% PNEUS 200% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% PNEUS 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA 100% MILELLA

OHCA067030/OHCA067031/OHCA067032/OHCA067033

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight

849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit, including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry. Overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. If the GVWR or the GAWR is exceeded, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the handling of your vehicle. These could cause you to lose control and result in an accident.

Example 1
				+
	Maximum Load(1400 lbs.)(635 kg)		Passenger Weight(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)		Cargo Weight(1100 lbs.)(499 kg)
Example 2
				+
	Maximum Load(1400 lbs.)(635 kg)		Passenger Weight(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)		Cargo Weight(650 lbs.)(295 kg)
Example 3
				+
			Passenger Weight(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)		Cargo Weight(540 lbs.)(245 kg)

Certification label

GAWR FRONT GVWR GAWR REAR PAINT TRIM THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S.A. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER, AND THEET PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE V.I.N PASSENGER CAR OBH059070

The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pillar and shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The total weight of the vehicle, including all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

WARNING

Overloading

• Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicle's handling and braking ability, and cause an accident.
• Do not overload your vehicle. Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling-all of which may result in a crash.

NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

WARNING

If you carry items inside your vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else), they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

• Put items in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Do not stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.
  • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.

TRAILER TOWING

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

What to do in an emergency

Hazard Warning Flasher 6-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving......6-2

If the Engine Stalls While Driving 6-2

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing......6-2

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving 6-3

If the Engine Will Not Start....6-3

If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly 6-3

If the Engine Turns Over Normally but Doesn't Start 6-3

Jump Starting....6-4

If the Engine Overheats....6-6

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......6-8

Check Tire Pressure 6-8

Tire Pressure Monitoring System....6-9

Low Tire Pressure Telltale 6-10

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position Indicator....6-10

TPMS Malfunction Indicator 6-11

Changing a Tire with TPMS....6-12

If You Have a Flat Tire....6-14

Jack and Tools 6-14

Changing Tires....6-15

Towing 6-21

Towing Service....6-21

Removable Towing Hook 6-22

Emergency Towing....6-23

Tie-down Hook....6-24

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

■Type A ■Type B OHCA067001

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button. The button is located in the center fascia panel. Both the left and right turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

• Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.
• Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroads or crossing, if safe to do so, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, move the shift lever into P (Park), and apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly

• Be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park). The engine starts only when the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle. See instructions for "Jump Starting" provided in this chapter.

CAUTION

Push or pull starting the vehicle may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can lead to damage to the emission control system.

If the Engine Turns Over Normally but Doesn't Start

Check the fuel level and add fuel if necessary.

If the engine still does not start, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

JUMP STARTING

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

- Only use a 12-volt power supply (battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.

- Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the engine compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park) and set the parking brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

1VQA4001 2 (+) 3 (-) 4 (-) 1 (+)

1. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).

2. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).
   Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

5. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.
   If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gage indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving parts such as the cooling fan and drive belt to prevent serious injury.

1. Check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)
2. If engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with a pressurized coolant reserve tank. NEVER remove the engine coolant reservoir

tank/radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are HOT. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down. Use extreme care when removing the engine coolant reservoir tank/radiator cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to release some of the pressure from the system. Step back while the pressure is released.

When you are sure all the pressure has been released, continue turning the cap counterclockwise to remove it.

1. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
2. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and warning symbol (no readable text or symbols)

② Low Pressure psi

OHCA067005

(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(2) Low Tire Pressure / Tire Pressure Monitor / TPMS Malfunction Display (shown on the cluster LCD display)

Check Tire Pressure

Tire Pressure psi

OHCA067007

• You can check the tire pressure in the Assist mode on the cluster.
  Refer to the "LCD Display Mode" section in chapter 3.

• A "Drive to display" message will appear for the first few minutes of driving after initial engine start up. If the tire pressure is not displayed after a few minutes of driving, check the tire pressures.

• The displayed tire pressure may differ from those measured with a tire pressure gage.

• You can change the tire pressure unit in the User Settings mode on the cluster.
• psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User Settings Mode" section in chapter 3).

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

If any of the below happens, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS Malfunction Indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is placed to the ON position or engine is running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD display remains illuminated

Low Tire Pressure Telltale

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with Position Indicator

Low Pressure psi

OHCA067005

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated and the warning message is displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The LCD position indicator will indicate which tire is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position light.

If any of your tire pressures are indicated as being low, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering, and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator will remain on and the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

NOTICE

The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure sensor.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the individual tire pressures in the cluster LCD display will not be available. Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is near electric power supply cables or radio transmitters such as police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate if snow chains are used or electronic devices such as computers, chargers, remote starters, navigation, etc. This may interfere with normal operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure and LCD position indicator will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION

It is recommended that you do not use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. Tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI dealer may damage the tire pressure sensor.

The spare tire does not come with a tire pressure monitoring sensor. When the low pressure tire or the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator will remain on. Also, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is driven at speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20 minutes.

Once the original tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sensor is reinflated to the recommended pressure and reinstalled on the vehicle, the Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator and TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go off within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicators do not disappear after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem (except for the spare tire). You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

You may not be able identify a tire with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gage to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

WARNING

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

i Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

WARNING

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in this section when changing a tire to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.

CAUTION

Be careful as you use the jack handle to stay clear of the flat end. The flat end has sharp edges that could cause cuts.

Jack and Tools

Mechanical assembly diagram showing three labeled parts (1, 2, 3) with no visible text or symbols beyond labels

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment under the luggage box cover.

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

Close-up of a car wheel with blue circular arrows indicating rotation or cycle, no text or symbols present.

Turn the winged hold down bolt counterclockwise to remove the spare tire.

Store the spare tire in the same compartment by turning the winged hold down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tire and tools from "rattling", store them in their proper location.

Close-up of a car tire with a blue arrow indicating direction, showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-down wing bolt by hand, you can loosen it easily using the jack handle.

1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise with the jack handle.

Changing Tires

WARNING

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a jack causing serious injury or death to you or those nearby. Take the following safety precautions:

• Never place any portion of your body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a tire in the lane of traffic. ALWAYS move the vehicle completely off the road on level, firm ground away from traffic before trying to change a tire. If you cannot find a level, firm place off the road, call a towing service for assistance.
• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.
  • ALWAYS place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and NEVER on the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Keep children away from the road and the vehicle.

Follow these steps to change your vehicle's tire:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) or into R (Reverse) if equipped with a manual transmission, apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.

Illustration of a silver sedan with attached sensors and exhaust pipe (no text or symbols)

1. Block both the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite of the tire you are changing.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each in the order shown above, but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off of the ground.

OHCA067014OHCA067013 OHCA068015

Diagram of a car under load with two views of the suspension frame (no text or symbols present)

1. Place the jack at the designated jacking position under the frame closest to the tire you are changing. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two notches. Never jack at any other position or part of the vehicle. Doing so may damage the side seal molding or other parts of the vehicle.

Mechanical diagram showing a car's wheel and attached lever mechanism with a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Make sure the vehicle is stable on the jack.

2. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel lug nut wrench and remove them with your fingers. Remove the wheel from the studs and lay it flat on the ground out of the way. Remove any dirt or debris from the studs, mounting surfaces, and wheel.

3. Install the spare tire onto the studs of the hub.
4. Tighten the lug nuts with your fingers onto the studs with the smaller end of the lug nuts closest to the wheel.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. Double-check each lug nut until they are tight. After changing tires, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the lug nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible. The wheel lug nut should be tightened to 79\~94 lbf·ft (11\~13 kgf·m).

Close-up of a car tire with numbered components and a blue curved arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

OHCR066023OHCA067016

If you have a tire gage, check the tire pressure (see "Tires and Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or higher than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and adjust it to the recommended pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After changing tires, secure the flat tire and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

NOTICE

• Check the tire pressure as soon as possible after installing a spare tire. Adjust it to the recommended pressure.
• Check and tighten the wheel lug nuts after driving over 31 mile (50 km) if tires are replaced. Recheck the tire wheel lug nuts after driving over 621 mile (1,000km).

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the studs and lug nuts. Make certain during tire changing that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled. If you have to replace your lug nuts make sure they have metric threads to avoid damaging the studs and ensure the wheel is properly secured to the hub. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

If any of the equipment such as the jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equipment is damaged or in poor condition, do not attempt to change the tire and call for assistance.

Use of compact spare tires

Compact spare tires are designed for emergency use only. Drive carefully on the compact spare tire and always follow the safety precautions.

WARNING

To prevent compact spare tire failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire only in an emergency.
  • NEVER operate your vehicle over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load rating or the load carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare tire continuously. Repair or replace the original tire as soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tire.

When driving with the compact spare tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after installing the compact spare tire. The compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire's tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

NOTICE

When the original tire and wheel are repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nut torque must be set correctly. The correct lug nut tightening torque is 79\~94 lbf·ft (11\~13 kgf·m).

CAUTION

To prevent damaging the compact spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards, such as a potholes or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel.

Jack label

Example

2. Max. 1 kg □□□□kg 4 3 8 H P R 5 6 7 9 12 RESENTATIVE: □□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□ 11 DATE OF MANUFACTURE (YYYYMM) K E I C E ■ 聚乙烯型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝绳型钢丝线圈 ADD #2091-12 Jeongwang 2 Song Shungang's Cyberngangdu. 주소: 죽공사 사동시 전용품 2091-12 10 □ □ □ CO., LTD.

OHYK065011

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the shift lever to the P (Park) position on vehicles with intelligent variable transmission (IVT).

9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and address

TOWING

Towing Service

dolly dolly OYC066010

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

CAUTION

- Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

OHCA067019 (Continued)

(Continued)

- Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use a wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

Illustration of a car being towed by a crane, with a blue prohibition symbol overlay (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

- Do not tow the vehicle with four wheels in contact with the ground if it is the vehicle equipped with DCT or IVT. Otherwise, the transmission will be seriously damaged. Also, make sure not to tow the vehicle connecting it with other vehicles including camper vans.

Illustration of a van connected to a parking lot with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed. The side impact and curtain air bag may deploy if the sensor detects the situation as a rollover.

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Failure to place the shift lever in N (Neutral) when being towed with the front wheels on the ground can cause internal damage to the transmission.

Removable Towing Hook

Illustration of a car trunk with an open lid and a close-up inset showing a tool (no text or symbols)

1. Open the trunk, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

Diagram showing car interior components with blue arrows indicating rotation or movement, no readable text or symbols present.

1. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front or rear bumper.
2. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.
3. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Emergency Towing

■Front ■Rear OHCR066019 OHCR066017

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If a towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

The driver must be in the vehicle for steering and braking operations when the vehicle is being towed. Passengers other than the driver must not be in the vehicle.

Always follow these emergency towing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the ACC position so the steering wheel is not locked. (if equipped)
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced braking performance.
• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.
  • The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

Diagram showing four vehicle positions with a distance measurement between them, likely illustrating a vehicle or logistics scenario.

OHCA067029

• Use a towing cable or chain less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inch (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during towing.
• Before towing, check the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.

NOTICE

Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle in a slow and gradual manner while maintaining tension on the tow rope or chain to start or drive the vehicle, otherwise tow hooks and the vehicle may be damaged.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing:

• Always pull straight ahead when using the towing hooks. Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
- Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.
- Limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing to avoid serious damage to the intelligent variable transmission (IVT).

- The vehicle with the manual transmission (MT) should be towed at a speed of 15 mph (25km/h) or less within the distance of 12 mile (20km).

Tie-down Hook

WARNING

Do not use the tie-down hook(s) for towing purposes. If the tie-down hook(s) are used for towing, the tie-down hook(s) or bumper will be damaged and this could lead to serious injury.

Maintenance

Engine compartment 7-3

Maintenance services 7-4

Owner's Responsibility....7-4

Owner Maintenance Precautions....7-4

Owner maintenance....7-5

Owner Maintenance Schedule....7-6

Scheduled maintenance services....7-7

Normal Maintenance Schedule

(Smartstream G1.6) 7-8

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions

(Smartstream G1.6)....7-11

Severe Driving Conditions....7-12

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.7-13

Engine oil 7-16

Checking the Engine Oil Level 7-16

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter....7-17

Engine coolant....7-18

Checking the Engine Coolant Level....7-18

Changing Engine Coolant 7-20

Brake/clutch fluid....7-21

Checking the Brake/Clutch Fluid Level 7-21

Washer fluid 7-22

Checking the Washer Fluid Level....7-22

Parking brake 7-22

Checking the Parking Brake....7-22

Air cleaner 7-23

Filter Replacement....7-23

Climate control air filter 7-24

Filter Inspection....7-24

Wiper blades....7-26

Blade Inspection 7-26

Blade Replacement 7-26

Battery....7-28

For Best Battery Service 7-29

Battery Recharging 7-29

Reset Features....7-30

Tires and wheels....7-31

Tire Care....7-31

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures....7-32

Check Tire Inflation Pressure 7-33

Tire Rotation....7-33

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 7-34

Tire Replacement 7-35

Wheel Replacement 7-36

Tire Traction....7-36

Tire Maintenance....7-36

Tire Sidewall Labeling 7-36

Tire Terminology and Definitions....7-40

All Season Tires....7-43

Summer Tires 7-43

Snow Tires 7-44

Radial-Ply Tires....7-44

Low Aspect Ratio Tires....7-44

Fuses....7-46

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement....7-47

Fuse/Relay Panel Description....7-50

Light bulbs....7-61

Headlamp, Position lamp, Fog lamp, Daytime Running

Light, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker .....7-61

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement....7-67

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement .....7-67

High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....7-70

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement 7-70

Appearance care....7-72

Exterior Care....7-72

Interior Care 7-77

Emission control system 7-80

Crankcase Emission Control System 7-80

Evaporative Emission Control System Including

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)....7-80

Exhaust Emission Control System 7-81

California perchlorate notice 7-84

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Smartstream G1.6

Interior view of a car's hood and engine bay with numbered components (no visible text or symbols)

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
4. Battery
5. Fuse box
6. Air cleaner
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OHCA079001

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI's high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner's Responsibility

Maintenance service and record retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

Owner Maintenance Precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. Several procedures can be done only by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any service or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNING

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ALWAYS follow these precautions for performing maintenance work:

- Park your vehicle on level ground, move the shift lever into the P (Park, for intelligent variable transmission vehicle) position or neutral (for manual transmission vehicle), apply the parking brake, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Block the tires (front and back) to prevent the vehicle from moving.
  Remove loose clothing or jewelry that can become entangled in moving parts.
• If you must run the engine during maintenance, do so out doors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery and fuel-related parts.

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner Maintenance Schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.
• Check the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the brake lights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

At least twice a year: (i.e., every Spring and Autumn)

• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer a fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and function.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather strips.
• Lubricate door checker.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate intelligent variable transmission (IVT) linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.
- Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.
- Extensive use of brakes.
- Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used.
- Driving on rough or muddy roads.
- Driving in mountainous areas.
- Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
- Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
- More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C).
- Engine oil usage which is not recommended (mineral type, lower grade spec, etc.)

For additional information or assistance see your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

After 10 years or 100,000 miles, we recommend to use severe maintenance schedule.

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Smartstream G1.6)

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

Months 12 24

36

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

132

144

156

Miles×1,000

8

16

24

32

40

48

56

64

72

80

88

96

104

Km×1,000

13

26

39

52

65

78

91

104

117

130

143

156

169

Rotate tires

Rotate tires every 8,000 miles (13,000 km)

Engine oil and engine oil filter *1

R R

R R R

R R R

R R R

R R R

R R

Fuel additives *2

Add fuel additives every 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 12 months

Air cleaner filter

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

I

R

I

Drive belts *3

At first, inspect at 48,000 miles (78,000 km) or 72 months,after that, inspect every 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 12 months

Spark plugs

Replace every 96,000 miles

Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Vacuum hose

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Fuel Filter

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Fuel tank air filter

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I: Inspect: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
* : Requires API SN PLUS (or above) grade engine oil. If a lower grade engine oil is used, then the engine oil and engine oil filter must be replaced at every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months as indicated for severe maintenance condition.
* : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
* : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Smartstream G1.6) (CONT)

MAINTENANCEINTERVALSMAINTENANCEITEM	Months 12 24	36 48	60 72	84 96	108 120	132	144 156
	Miles×1,000	8 16 24	32 40	48 56	64 72	80 88	96 104
	Km×1,000 13	26 39	52 65	78 91	104 117	130	143 156	169
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I
Engine coolant		At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :Thereafter, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections		I I I I I I I I I I I I
Parking brake			I I I I I I
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid		Inspect every 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 12 months,Replace every 48,000 miles (78,000 km) or 48 months
Disc brakes and pads		I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots		I I I I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots		I I I I I I I I I I I
Suspension mounting bolts		I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant		I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor		I I I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter		Replace every 12 Months

I: Inspect: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Smartstream G1.6) (CONT)

MAINTENANCEINTERVALSMAINTENANCEITEM

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156

Miles×1,000 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104

Km×1,000 13 26 39 52 65 78 91 104 117 130 143 156 169

Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) || |

Intelligent variable transmission (IVT)fluid (if equipped)

No check, No service required

Exhaust pipe and muffler

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I: Inspect: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions (Smartstream G1.6)

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM	MAINTENANCE OPERATION	MAINTENANCE INTERVALS	DRIVING CONDITION
Engine oil and filter *1	R Every 5,000 miles or 6 months		A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K
Intelligent variable transmission (IVT) fluid (if equipped)	R Every 60,000 miles A, C, E, F, G, I
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped)	R Every 75,000 miles		C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake shoes or disc/pads	I	More frequently	C, D, G, F

*1: If a lower grade engine oil (below API SN PLUS) is substituted, then the engine oil and engine oil filter must be replaced at every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months as indicated for severe maintenance condition.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE ITEM	MAINTENANCE OPERATION	MAINTENANCE INTERVALS	DRIVING CONDITION
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint	I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter(for evaporator and blower unit)	R	More frequently	C, E

Severe Driving Conditions

A - Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
L - Usage of Mineral oil or Semi-synthetic oil

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

Fuel Filter

A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the vehicle driving speed, damage the emission system, and cause the hard starting. When a considerable amount of foreign substances are accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel filter should be replaced.

Upon installing a new fuel filter, operate the engine for several minutes, and check the connections for any leakages. Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum Crankcase Ventilation Hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to ensure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air Cleaner Filter

A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Cooling System

Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Engine Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Intelligent Variable Transmission (IVT) Fluid (if equipped)

Intelligent Variable Transmission (IVT) Fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions. But, the Intelligent Variable Transmission (IVT) Fluid should be changed under severe usage conditions. We recommend that the Intelligent Variable Transmission (IVT) Fluid changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule.

(Refer to "Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" in this chapter.)

NOTICE

Intelligent variable transmission (IVT) fluid color is basically light amber.

As the vehicle is driven, the intelligent variable transmission (IVT) fluid will begin to look darker. This is a normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

CAUTION

The use of non-specified fluid (even marked as compatible with genuine) could result in shift quality deterioration and vibrations, and eventual transmission failure.

Use only specified Intelligent Variable Transmission (IVT) fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in chapter 8.)

WARNING

- Do not change oil.

In case of repair, use only Genuine SP-CVT1

Inspect the manual transmission fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/Clutch Fluid

Check the brake/clutch fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level should be between the MIN and the MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake/clutch fluid conforming to DOT4 specification.

Parking Brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake cables.

Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and the engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the Engine Oil Level

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer's precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level ground in P (Park) with the parking brake set. If possible, block the wheels.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
4. Turn the engine off and wait about 10 minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and a highlighted section (no readable text or symbols)

1. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

Close-up of a mechanical engine with a pouring bottle and valve, no visible text or symbols

1. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F.

Use only the specified engine oil. (refer to "Recommended Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your engine:

• Do not overfill with engine oil. Add oil in small quantities and recheck level to ensure engine is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when adding or changing engine oil. Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components. Wipe off spilled oil immediately.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

HYUNDAI RECOMMENDS QUAKER STATE

Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the Engine Coolant Level

Smartstream G1.6

OHCA079075

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between the F and the L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water to bring the level to the F mark, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only distilled (deionized) water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can result in severe malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

- Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixing percentage, refer to the following table:

Ambient Temperature	Mixture Percentage (volume)
	Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C)	35 65
-13°F (-25°C)	40 60
-31°F (-35°C)	50 50
-49°F (-45°C)	60 40

i Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of -31°F and higher.

WARNING

Never remove the engine coolant reservoir tank/radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down. Use extreme care when removing the engine coolant reservoir tank/radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

WARNING

The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the engine is not running and can cause serious injury. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.

Maintenance

The electric motor for the cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. If your vehicle is equipped with GDI, the electric motor for the cooling fan may begin to operate at any time and continue to operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.

Changing Engine Coolant

Have coolant changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

WARNING

Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Engine coolant may also cause damage to paint and body trim.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to engine parts, put a thick towel around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts, such as the alternator.

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Checking the Brake/Clutch Fluid Level

Interior view of a car engine bay with visible hoses, valves, and a blue arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add the specified brake/clutch fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake/clutch linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake/clutch system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

If the brake/clutch system requires frequent additions of fluid this could indicate a leak in the brake/clutch system. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid comes in contact with your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

NOTICE

• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.
• Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should NEVER be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of brake/clutch fluid. A few drops of mineral based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake/clutch system can damage brake/clutch system parts.

i Information

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid (refer to "Recommended Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).

WASHER FLUID

Checking the Washer Fluid Level

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay showing internal components and a blue component with an arrow pointing to a valve (no text or symbols visible)

OHCA077051

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury or death, take the following safety precautions when using washer fluid:

- Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident or damage to paint and body trim.

• Do not allow sparks or flames to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Washer fluid may contain alcohol and can be flammable.
• Do not drink washer fluid and avoid contact with skin. Washer fluid is harmful to humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from children and animals.

PARKING BRAKE

Checking the Parking Brake

Interior view of a car gear shift lever and seat (no text or symbols visible)

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of "clicks" heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 6 clicks at a force of 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N)

AIR CLEANER

Filter Replacement

Interior view of a vehicle showing internal components and a highlighted blue engine cylinder (no text or symbols visible)

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned for inspection using compressed air. Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it, as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be replaced.

Close-up of a mechanical component with internal flow arrows and no visible text or symbols

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

Close-up of a mechanical component with blue arrows indicating flow or movement, no visible text or symbols

1. Replace the air cleaner filter.
2. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips.
3. Check that the cover is firmly installed.

i Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals (refer to "Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" in this chapter).

NOTICE

• Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed. This will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

Filter Inspection

The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

Interior view of a car showing a blue plastic tray with airflow arrows, no text or symbols visible

1. With the glove box open, lower the glove box by pushing both sides.

Close-up of a car interior showing a blue mechanical component and a white arrow pointing to a component, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Remove the support rod (1). 3. Press and hold the lock (1) on

Laptop interior diagram with numbered components and blue arrows indicating directional flow or movement

Press and hold the lock (1) on both sides of the cover.
4. Pull out (2) the cover.

OPD076026OHCA077068

1. Replace the climate control air filter.
2. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol (↓) facing downwards, otherwise, it may be noisy and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.

WIPER BLADES

Blade Inspection

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wiper functionality. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, arms or other components, do not:

• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.

i Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Blade Replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

NOTICE

• In order to prevent damage to the hood and the wiper arms, the wiper arms should only be lifted when in the top wiping position.
  • Always return the wiper arms to the windshield before driving.

Front windshield wiper blade replacement

Type A

Diagram of a curved mechanical component with a blue arrow indicating rotation, labeled 'OLMB073020' (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1. Put the front windshield wipers into the service position.
2. Raise the wiper arm and slightly rotate the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

NOTICE

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLMB073021 OLMB073022

1. Press the clip (1) and slide the blade assembly downward (2).
2. Lift it off the arm.
3. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-shield.

■Type B

Close-up of a curved metallic blade or blade with a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Raise the wiper arm.

NOTICE

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

Close-up of a cable with two inset images showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Lift the wiper blade clip. Then push down the blade body.

Close-up of a metallic tool or wire with a blue arrow indicating a specific feature, no visible text or symbols.

1. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
2. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

BATTERY

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

- When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

- Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.

- The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

• When you do not use the vehicle for a long time in a low temperature area, disconnect the battery and keep it indoors.
  • Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature areas.

For Best Battery Service

Interior view of a car engine bay with blue battery pack and orange arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

Battery Recharging

WARNING

Always follow these instructions when recharging your vehicle's battery to avoid the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH from explosions or acid burns:

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.
  • Always work outdoors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
  • The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in a well ventilated area.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected. Disconnect the battery charger in the following order:

(1) Turn off the battery charger main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.
• Always use a genuine HYUNDAI approved battery when you replace the battery.

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good battery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 minutes before it is shutoff. The vehicle may not restart if you shut it off before the battery had a chance to adequately recharge. See "Jump Starting" in chapter 6 for more information on jump starting procedures.

i Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Reset Features

The following items may need to be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected. See chapter 3 or 4 for:

• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
  • Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof

TIRES AND WHEELS

WARNING

Tire failure may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. To reduce risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• Inspect your tires monthly for proper inflation as well as wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar. Always use a tire pressure gauge to measure tire pressure. Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

Tire Care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Close-up of a car interior showing a highlighted electronic component (no text or symbols visible)

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver's side center pillar.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or has been driven for less than one mile (1.6 km).

Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be under-inflated. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in chapter 8.

WARNING

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that could result in loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

CAUTION

• Under-inflation results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation is also possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

Check Tire Inflation Pressure

Check your tires, including the spare tire, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tire pressure gauge to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar or in this manual. No further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended pressure. Make sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

Tire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI recommends that the tires be rotated according to the maintenance schedule or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find any of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness (proper torque is 79\~94 lbf·ft [11\~13 kgf·m]).

graph TD
    subgraph "Without a spare tire"
        A1[" "] --> B1[" "]
        A2[" "] --> C1[" "]
        A3[" "] --> D1[" "]
        A4[" "] --> E1[" "]
        A5[" "] --> F1[" "]
        A6[" "] --> G1[" "]
        A7[" "] --> H1[" "]
        A8[" "] --> I1[" "]
        A9[" "] --> J1[" "]
        A10[" "] --> K1[" "]
        A11[" "] --> L1[" "]
        A12[" "] --> M1[" "]
        A13[" "] --> N1[" "]
        A14[" "] --> O1[" "]
        A15[" "] --> P1[" "]
        A16[" "] --> Q1[" "]
        A17[" "] --> R1[" "]
        A18[" "] --> S1[" "]
        A19[" "] --> T1[" "]
        A20[" "] --> U1[" "]
        A21[" "] --> V1[" "]
        A22[" "] --> W1[" "]
        A23[" "] --> X1[" "]
        A24[" "] --> Y1[" "]
        A25[" "] --> Z1[" "]
        A26[" "] --> AA1[" "]
        A27[" "] --> AB1[" "]
        A28[" "] --> AC1[" "]
        A29[" "] --> AD1[" "]
        A30[" "] --> AE1[" "]
        A31[" "] --> AF1[" "]
        A32[" "] --> AG1[" "]
        A33[" "] --> AH1[" "]
        A34[" "] --> AI1[" "]
        A35[" "] --> AJ1[" "]
        A36[" "] --> AK1[" "]
        A37[" "] --> AL1[" "]
        A38[" "] --> AM1[" "]
        A39[" "] --> AN1[" "]
        A40[" "] --> AO1[" "]
        A41[" "] --> AP1[" "]
        A42[" "] --> AQ1[" "]
        A43[" "] --> AR1[" "]
        A44[" "] --> AS1[" "]
        A45[" "] --> AT1[" "]
        A46[" "] --> AU1[" "]
        A47[" "] --> AV1[" "]
        A48[" "] --> AW1[" "]
        A49[" "] --> AX1[" "]
        A50[" "] --> AY1[" "]
        A51[" "] --> AZ1[" "]
        A52[" "] --> BA1[" "]
        A53[" "] --> BB1[" "]
        A54[" "] --> BC1[" "]
        A55[" "] --> BD1[" "]
        A56[" "] --> BE1[" "]
        A57[" "] --> BF1[" "]
        A58[" "] --> BG1[" "]
        A59[" "] --> BH1[" "]
        A60[" "] --> BI1[" "]
        A61[" "] --> BJ1[" "]
        A62[" "] --> BK1[" "]
        A63[" "] --> BL1[" "]
        A64[" "] --> BM1[" "]
        A65[" "] --> BN1[" "]
        A66[" "] --> BO1[" "]
        A67[" "] --> BP1[" "]
        A68[" "] --> BZ1[" "]
        A69[" "] --> CA1[" "]
        A70[" "] --> CB1[" "]
    end
    subgraph "With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)"
        D1((S2BLA790A))
        D2((S2BLA790A))
    end

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

i Information

Tires that are asymmetrical or directional can only be installed on the wheel in one direction. The outside and inside of an asymmetrical tire is not easily distinguishable. Pay careful attention to the markings on the sidewalls of the tires, noting the "outside" marking and also the rotating direction before installing them on the vehicle.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

NOTICE

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tire Replacement

Tread wear indicator OLMB073027

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 2/32 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the tread surface to become level with the tread wear indicators before replacing the tire.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY:

- Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and traction.

• Always replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, HYUNDAI recommends that tires be replaced after six (6) years of normal service.
- When replacing tires (or wheels), it is recommended to replace the two front or two rear tires (or wheels) as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If only replacing one pair of tires, it is recommended to install the pair of new tires on the rear axle.
- Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning may cause sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

WARNING

The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare and loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle over 50 mph (80 km/h) when using the compact spare tire.

Wheel Replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

Tire Traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when the tread depth is at least 2/32 inch (1.6 mm). To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire Maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1 5,6 7 4 3 2 NAME OF TIME 1 OLMB073028

1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

225/45R17 91W

225 - Tire width in millimeters.

45 - Aspect ratio. The tire's section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

91 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

W - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0J X 17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicle tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed Rating Symbol	Maximum Speed
S 112	mph (180 km/h)
T 118	mph (190 km/h)
H 130	mph (210 km/h)
V 149	mph (240 km/h)
W 168	mph (270 km/h)
Y 186	mph (300 km/h)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over six years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

The front part of the DOT shows a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1420 represents that the tire was produced in the 14th week of 2020.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREAD WEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, over-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure

The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight

This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are intelligent variable transmission (IVT), power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio

The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt

A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure

The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight

This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings

A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck(LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load ratings

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Load Index

An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight

The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight

The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall

An asymmetrical tire has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

7-42

Passenger (P-Metric) tire

A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

Pneumatic options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty breaks, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Recommended Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim

A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating

An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction

The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars", that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of tread remains.

UTQGS

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards is a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight

The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire

Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard

A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

All Season Tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer Tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, HYUNDAI recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Maintenance

Snow Tires

If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Radial-Ply Tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical pairs of radial-ply tires should always be used as a set for the front tires and a set for the rear tires.

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval in this chapter to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

WARNING

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Low Aspect Ratio Tires

The aspect ratio is lower than 50 on low aspect ratio tires.

Because low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, their sidewall is a little stiffer than a standard tire. Also low aspect ratio tires tend to be wider and consequently have a greater contact patch with the road surface. In some instances they may generate more road noise compared with standard tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of a low aspect ratio tire is shorter than a standard tire, the rim of the wheel and the tire itself is more easily susceptible to damage. Use caution when driving and follow the guidelines below to help minimize damage to the wheel and tire:

• When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged.
• If the tire is subjected to a severe impact, have the tire and wheel inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,800 miles (3,000km).

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

FUSES

■Blade type

Normal

Blown

■Cartridge type

Normal

Blown

■Multi fuse

Close-up of a mechanical device with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a computer monitor with a magnified inset showing a CD (no visible text or symbols)

OLF074075

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the engine and all switches off, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

NEVER replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly cause a fire.
- Do not install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and possibly a fire.

NOTICE

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement

Power connector

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no visible text or symbols)

If your vehicle is to be parked for more than a month you need to do as follows previously in order to prevent battery discharge.

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlamps and tail lamps.
3. Open the inner fuse panel cover and pull out the power connector.

Inner panel fuse replacement

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted component and an inset showing internal circuit board (no text or symbols visible)

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.

4. Refer to the label on the inside of the fuse panel cover to locate the suspected fuse location.

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.

6. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse panels (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

Maintenance

In an emergency, if you do not have a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle.

If the headlamps or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are undamaged, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement

Blade type fuse OHCA077070

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tap and pulling up.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse box in the engine compartment securely close the fuse box cover inside the engine compartment, until it clicks.

If the fuse box is not closed properly, water may leak in side, possibly causing a malfunction with the electrical system.

Main fuse

Interior view of a vehicle showing a blue internal battery unit and an inset circuit board (no text or symbols visible)

Multi fuse

Interior view of a computer case showing internal components and a close-up of an electronic circuit board (no visible text or symbols)

If the main fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

i Information

If the main fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuse/Relay Panel Description Instrument panel fuse panel

Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue arrow pointing to the dashboard panel, showing no visible text or symbols.

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

20A AUDIO 10A ROOM LAMP DOOR LOCK 20A POWER OUTLET 20A HEATED MIRROR 10A DRL 10A P/WINDOW RH 25A SAFETY P/WINDOW 25A STOP LAMP 15A T/SIGNAL LAMP 15A C/LIGHTER 20A 2 MODULE 10A TCU 15A P/WINDOW LH 25A S/HEATER 20A SPARE 10A START 7.5A TAIL LAMP RH 7.5A 2 MODULE 10A 3 ABS 7.5A BRAKE SWITCH 10A 2 SPARE 25A FOG LAMP REAR 10A HEATED STEERING 15A TAIL LAMP LH 7.5A 3 MODULE 7.5A 3 ABS 7.5A SUNROOF 15A BCM 10A FOG LAMP FRONT 15A 1 A/C 7.5A 5 MODULE 10A 7 MODULE 10A ECU 10A SUNROOF 15A IMMO 10A 6 MODULE 10A 4 SPARE 10A 4 MODULE 7.5A 5 SPARE 10A AIR BAG 10A 1 MODULE 7.5A SMART KEY 25A 2 A/C 7.5A WIPER RR 15A WIPER FRT 25A ACC 10A 3 SPARE 20A A/BAG IND 7.5A CLUSTER 7.5A 2 MDPS 7.5A OHCA079076

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Circuit		it Protected
DOOR LOCK	20A	I/P Junction Block (Tail Gate Unlock Relay, Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Two Turn Unlock Relay)
POWER OUTLET 20A Power Outlet
SAFETY P/WINDOW	25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
STOP LAMP 15A	I/P Junction Block(Stop Signal Electronic Module)
T/SIGNAL LAMP 15A BCM, SLM
C/LIGHTER 20A	Cigarette Lighter
HEATED MIRROR	10A	Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
DRL 10A BCM
P/WINDOW RH	25A	Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch
S/HEATER 20A	Front Seat Warmer Control Module
SPARE1 10A -
START 7.5A		With Smart Key : ECM/PCM, E/R Junction Block(Start Relay), Smart Key Control Module,Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock & Clutch SwitchW/O Smart Key : Burglar Alarm Relay, Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock & Clutch Switch

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
TAIL LAMP RH 7.5A		Head Lamp RH, Rear Combination Lamp (OUT) RH, License Lamp RH,Rear Combination Lamp (IN) RH, ILL (+)
MODULE2 10A FCA Module, Crash Pad Switch
TCU	15A	E/R Junction Block(Fuse - B/UP LAMP), A/T Shift Lever, Transaxle Range Switch, Stop Lamp Switch
P/WINDOW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch
SPARE2 25A Spare
FOG LAMP REAR 10A -
HEATED STEERING 15A Clock Spring
TAIL LAMP LH	7.5A	Head Lamp LH, License Lamp LH, Rear Combination Lamp (OUT) LH, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH
MODULE3 7.5A		Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/C Control Module,Clock Spring, A/T Shift Lever Indicator
ABS3	7.5A	E/R Junction Block(Multipurpose Check Connector), ESC Module
BRAKE SWITCH	10A	Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
BCM	10A BCM
FOG LAMP FRONT	15A I/P Junction	Block(Front Fog Lamp Relay)
A/C1 7.5A E/R	Junction Block(Blower Relay), A/C Control Module
MODULE5 10A	Sunroof Motor,	Front Seat Warmer Control Module
MODULE7 10A	TPMS Unit
ECU 10A ECM/PCM, Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
SUNROOF 15A	Sunroof Motor
IMMO. 10A Immobilizer Module
MODULE6 10A	Key Solenoid
SPARE4 10A Spare
MODULE4 7.5A	SLM, BCM, Smart Key Control Module
SPARE5 10A Spare
AIR BAG 10A SRS Control Module, Occupant Detection Sensor

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
MODULE1 7.5A	BCM, SLM, Key Interlock
SMART KEY 25A	Smart Key Control Module
A/C2 7.5A -
WIPER RR 15A	Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Motor, Rear Wiper Relay
WIPER FRT 25A	Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block(Wiper Lo Relay)
ACC 10A		I/P Junction Block(Power Outlet Relay), BCM, SLM, Audio,Key Interlock Power Outside Mirror Switch, Smart Key Control Module, USB Charging Connecto
SPARE3 20A Spare
A/BAG IND 7.5A	Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module
CLUSTER	7.5A Instrument Cluster
MDPS2	7.5A MDPS Unit
AUDIO	20A Audio
ROOM LP	10A	I/P Junction Block(Room Lamp Relay), Overhead Console Lamp , A/C Control Module, SLM, BCM,Auto Light & Photo Sensor, TPMS Unit ,Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, Room Lamp,Trunk Room Lamp, Electro Chromic Mirror

Engine compartment fuse panel

Close-up of an electronic device showing internal components and a highlighted case (no text or symbols visible)

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

SUB Relay Block Joint Connector (JE21) A/C 150A ALT MDPS 46A B+ 50A B+ 46A IG2 E81 START RELAY E82 BLOWER RELAY E83 FUEL PUMP RELAY E84 COOLING FAN1 RELAY E85 WIPER HI RELAY E86 WIPER LO RELAY E87 H/LAMP HI RELAY E88 HEAD LAMP RELAY E89 COOLING FAN2 RELAY E90 HORN RELAY E91 B/ALARM HORN RELAY E93 MAIN RELAY E99 MULTISPURPOSE CHECK CONNECTOR

OHCA077077

Type Relay NO. Relay Name
MICRO	AC A/C Relay
	E81 Start Relay
	E82 Blower Relay
	E83 Fuel Pump Relay
	E84 Cooling Fan1 Relay
	E85 Wiper HI Relay
	E86 Wiper LO Relay
	E87 H/Lamp HI Relay
	E88 Head Lamp Relay
	E89 Cooling Fan2 Relay
	E90 Horn Relay
	E91 B/Alarm Horn Relay
MINI E93 Horn Relay
Fuse Name Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
ALT 150A E/R Junction Block (Fuse - ABS1, ABS2, BLOWER, REAR HEATED)
REAR HEATED 40A I/P Junction	Block (Rear Defogger Relay)
ABS1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 40A ESC Module
BLOWER 40A E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)
WIPER 10A Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, E/R Junction Block (Wiper LO Relay)
ECU4 15A ECM/PCM
SENSOR1 10A
ECU2 15A ECM/PCM
ECU3 20A ECM/PCM
HEAD LAMP RH 10A Head Lamp	RH

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
HEAD LAMP LH 10A Head Lamp LH
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1-#4, Condenser
ECU5 15A ECM/PCM, E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)
B/UP LAMP 10A Reverse lamp switch
B+1 40A		I/P Junction Block (Fuse - DRL, FOGLAMP FRONT, STOP LAMP, MODULE6, Power Connector (AUDIO, ROOM LAMP))
B+2 50A		I/P Junction Block (Fuse - IMMO, SMART KEY1, BRAKE SWITCH, BCM, SAFETY P/WINDOW, S/HEATER, SUNROOF, Power Window Relay)
IG2	40A	Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay), E/R Junction Block (Start Relay)
COOLING FAN 40A E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan1/2 Relay)
ECU1 30A E/R Junction Block (Fuse - ECU3, ECU4, Main Relay)
B/ALARM HORN 10A B/Alarm Horn Relay
HEAD LAMP	20A	E/R Junction Block (Head Lamp Relay)
H/LAMP HI	20A	W/O DRL : E/R Junction Block (H/Lamp HI Relay)With DRL : SLM, BCM
FUEL PUMP 20A	E/R Junction Block (Fuel Pump Relay)
HORN 10A E/R Junction Block (Horn Relay)
A/C 10A Sub Relay Block (A/C Relay)
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
B+3 40A I/P Junction Block (Fuse - T/SIGNAL LAMP, DOOR LOCK, Tail Lamp Relay)
IG1 40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay, ACC Relay)
POWER OUTLET 40A I/P Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)

Engine compartment fuse panel (Battery terminal cover)

Interior view of a car engine showing internal components and a close-up of a device (no visible text or symbols)

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay names and ratings.

i Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

91971-F2100 AMS 10A 지정된 퓨즈만 사용하세요 USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY используйте только предназначенные предохранители USE SOLO LOS FUSIBLES ESPECIFICADOS

OHCA077078

NOTICE

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the cover. If it is not securely latched, electrical failure may occur from water contact.

LIGHT BULBS

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to replace most vehicle light bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true for removing the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

i Information

The headlamp and tail lamp lenses could appear frosty if the vehicle is washed after driving or the vehicle is driven at night in wet weather. This condition is caused by temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside and, it does not indicate a problem with your vehicle. When moisture condenses in the lamp, it will be removed after driving with the headlamp on. The removable level may differ depending on lamp size, lamp position and environmental condition. However, if moisture is not removed, we recommend that your vehicle is inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• Prior to replacing a lamp, depress the foot brake, move the shift lever into P (Park) apply the parking brake, place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position, and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and to prevent possible electric shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be hot and may burn your fingers.

Headlamp, Position lamp, Fog lamp, Daytime Running Light, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker

Type A

Close-up of a white car's head and side profile with numbered light fixtures (no text or symbols visible)

(1) Headlamp (High/Low)
(2) Front turn signal lamp/ Position lamp
(3) Side marker
(4) Front fog lamp*

* : if equipped

WARNING

Hand holding a mechanical component with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

• Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

3D cutaway view of a mechanical device showing internal components and a blue component (no text or symbols visible)

Headlamp (Halogen bulb)

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retaining wire by pressing the end and pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-lamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and snap the headlamp bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.
8. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

i Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3D cutaway view of a mechanical component with internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Turn signal lamp / Position lamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.

7. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Side marker

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb.

Mechanical component diagram showing internal parts and a highlighted blue key (no text or symbols)

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

1. Loosen the pin-type retainers of the under cover and then remove the undercover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots of the housing.

5. Install a new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

Type B

Close-up of a white car's head and side profile with numbered light trails (no text or symbols on the car itself)

(1) Headlamp (High/Low)
(2) Front turn signal lamp
(3) Side marker
(4) Position lamp / Daytime running lamp*
(5) Front fog lamp*

*: if equipped

WARNING

Hand holding a mechanical component with a blue prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

• Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.
- Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
- A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
- If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and a blue valve (no text or symbols visible)

Headlamp (Halogen Bulb)

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

5. Remove the bulb from the head-lamp assembly.

6. Install a new headlamp bulb and snap the headlamp bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

i Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Headlamp (LED lamp)

If the LED lamp does not operate, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3D technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Turn signal

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Side marker & Position lamp/Daytime running lamp

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Mechanical component diagram showing internal parts and a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

1. Loosen the pin-type retainers of the under cover and then remove the undercover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots of the housing.
5. Install a new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement

■Type A ■Type B HCR076032 OHCR046009

If the light bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ OHCA077033

(1) Rear turn signal lamp
(2) Reverse lamp
(3) Stop/Tail lamp
(4) Tail lamp
(5) Side marker

Interior view of a car showing the trunk and rear canopy with a blue logo on the side panel (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Stop/Tail lamp and turn signal lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Open the lamp assembly retaining screw covers.

Maintenance

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue circular mark and a dashed line, no visible text or symbols

1. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screw-driver.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue highlighted section and HCR076012H label (no readable text or symbols)

Stop/tail lamp Turn signal lamp

1. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.

2. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

5. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Side marker

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Exterior view of a silver sedan trunk cab with open lid (no visible text or symbols)

Tail lamp and backup lamp

1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the service cover using a flat-blade screwdriver.

Tail lamp Backup lamp OHCA067042

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
4. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots on the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.
5. Reinstall the service cover.

High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement

Close-up of a mechanical component with a blue curved component and an attached metallic connector (no visible text or symbols)

1.Open the trunk.
2. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

1. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
2. Remove the high mounted stop lamp after removing the mounting nuts.
3. Install a new lamp
4. Reinstall the rear spoiler and the trunk upper trim in the reverse order.

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement

Interior view of an airplane cabin showing flight suit, dashboard, and passenger window (no text or symbols visible)

HCR076014OYC076044

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from the lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp

■Map lamp OPD076056

■Trunk room lamp HCP076016

■Room lamp OAD075045

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the "OFF" button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

NOTICE

Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior Care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers)or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.
• Do not use any high-pressure nozzles, which induce either one-direct water stream or water swirling.

Protecting your vehicle's finish

Washing

To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, should be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water before getting on the road. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

NOTICE

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.
  Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.
  • To prevent damage to the plastic parts, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

Exterior view of a car with open hood and hand holding tool, no visible text or symbols

NOTICE

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
- Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

A good coat of wax provides a barrier between your paint and environmental contamination.

Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

NOTICE

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Repairing your vehicle's finish

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

NOTICE

• Do not use abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners containing acid or alkaline detergents.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, HYUNDAI produces vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

Maintenance

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

- If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

- When cleaning underneath the vehicle, pay particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

- When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Interior Care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil, from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.

NOTICE

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
• When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/ alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

NOTICE

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

- Features of seat leather

• Leather is made from the outer skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a natural product, each part differs in thickness or density.
  Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.
• The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.
• The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.
• Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the products.

CAUTION

• Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.
  • Make sure not to wet the seat. It may change the nature of natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat covering fabric.

• Caring for the leather seats

• Vacuum the seat periodically to remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.
• Use of proper leather protector may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the color. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.
• Light colored (beige, cream beige) leather is easily contaminated and the stain is noticeable. Clean the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.

- Cleaning the leather seats

• Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminated spot. Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.

- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natural leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.

Cleaning the seat belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

NOTICE

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations. There are three emission control systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to ensure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

NOTICE

For the Inspection and Maintenance Test (with Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-firing during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch (ESC OFF light illuminated).

- After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase Emission Control System

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative Emission Control System Including Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere. The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control sole-noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

When the engine starts or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission system.

Engine exhaust (carbon monoxide) precautions

- Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. If you smell exhaust fumes of any kind in your vehicle, drive with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

The exhaust system and catalytic converter are very hot during and immediately after the engine has been running. To avoid SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic converter or you may get burned.
  Also, Do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle, and do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

To prevent damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle, take the following precautions:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the engine off and descending steep grades in gear with the engine off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with extremely low fuel level. If you run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter.

Maintenance

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions....8-2

Engine....8-2

Bulb Wattage 8-3

Tires and Wheels 8-4

Volume and Weight....8-5

Air Conditioning System....8-5

Recommended Lubricants and Capacities......8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number 8-8

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 8-9

Vehicle Certification Label......8-9

Tire Specification and Pressure Label ......8-10

Engine Number....8-10

Consumer Information......8-11

Reporting Safety Defects 8-12

DIMENSIONS

Items in (mm)
Overall length 172.6 (4,385)
Overall width 68.0 (1,729)
Overall height 57.1 (1,450)
Front	185/65 R15 60.0 (1,524)
	205/45 R17 59.5 (1,512)
Rear	185/65 R15 60.2 (1,529)
	205/45 R17 59.7 (1,517)
Wheel base 101.5 (2,580)

ENGINE

Items Smartstream G1.6
Displacement cu. in (cc)	97.52 (1,598)
Bore x Stroke in. (mm)	2.98x3.50 (75.6x89)
Firing order	1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders	In-line 4 cylinder

BULB WATTAGE

Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Front	Headlamp	High/Low	Type A HB2 60/55
			Type B	HB3 60
				LED LED
		Position lamp	Type A PY28/8W	8
			Type B LED LED
		Side marker	Type A	W5W 5
			Type B LED LED
		Turn signal lamp	Type A PY28/8W	28
			Type B	PY21W 21
		Daytime running light(DRL)		LED LED
	Fog lamp			HB4 51
	Side repeater			N/A	N/A
Rear	Rear combination lamp	Tail/Stop	Type A	P28/8W	28/8
			Type B LED LED
		Tail	Type A	P28/8W	8
			Type B LED LED
		Turn signal		PY27W 27
		Back up		W16W	16
	License plate lamp			W5W 5
	High mounted stop lamp			W16W	16
Interior	Overhead console lamp			WEDGE	10
	Room lamp			FESTOON	10
	Vanity lamp			FESTOON	5

TIRES AND WHEELS

Items Tire Size	Wheel Size		Inflation pressure psi (kPa)				Wheel lug nut torque kgf·m (lbf·ft, N·m)
			Normal Load Maximum Load
			Front Rear	Front Rear
Full size tire	185/65 R15	5.5J X 15	33 (230)		33 (230)		11~13(79~94,107~127)
	205/45 R17	6.5J X 17
Compact spare tire	T125/80 D15	3.5J X 15	60 (420)		60 (420)

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
  Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• Air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level. (Air inflation per altitude: +2.4 psi/1 mile)

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

VOLUME AND WEIGHT

Items Smartstream G1.6
Gross vehicle weight	M/TIVT
	15" 17" 15"
Ibs. (kg)	3,439 (1,560)	3,638 (1,650)	3,527 (1,600)
Luggage volume (SAE)cu ft (l)	13.7 (387)

M/T : Manual transmission
IVT: Intelligent variable transmission

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Items	Weight of Volume	Classification
Refrigerantoz. (g)	16.9 ± 0.88 ( 480 ± 25 )	R-1234yf
Compressor lubricantoz. (cc)	3.88 ± 0.35 ( 110 ± 10 )	PAG

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1 (drain and refill)Recommends	4.02 US qt. (3.8 l)	SAE 0W-20, API SN PLUS/SP or ILSAC GF-6
Manual transmission fluid	1.7 ~ 1.8 US qt. (1.6 ~ 1.7 l)	HK SYN MTF 70W (SK)SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF(H.K.SHELL)GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)(API GL-4, SAE 70W TGO-9)
Intelligent variable transmission (IVT) fluid *2	6.87 US qt. (6.5 l)	SP-CVT1
Lubricant	Volume Classification
Coolant	5.3 / (5.60 US qt.)	Mixture of antifreeze and water(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake/Clutch fluid *3	0.7~0.8 US qt.(0.7~0.8 / )	DOT 4
Fuel	11.9 US gal. (45 / )	Refer to "Fuel requirements" in the Foreword chapter.

*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2: Use only specified genuine Intelligent Variable Transmission (IVT) fluid. The use of non-specified fluid (even marked as compatible with genuine) could result in shift quality deterioration and vibrations, and eventual transmission failure. (Refer to "Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance Items" in section 7)

WARNING- Do not change oil.In case of repair, use only Genuine SP-CVT1- Ne changez pas l'huile.En cas de réparation, utilisez uniquement SP-CVT1- 请勿随便更换油.需要维修的情况下,只能使用正品 SP-CVT1- Масло не заменять. В случае ремонта следует использовать только оригинальное SP-CVT1

*3 : To maintain the best braking performance and ABS/ESC performance, we recommend that you use genuine brake fluid that conform to specifications. (Standard : SAE J1704 DOT-4 LV, ISO4925 CLASS-6 and FMVSS 116 DOT-4)

Recommended SAE viscosity number

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature °C(°F)	-30	-20	-10	0	10	20	30	40
	-10	0	20	40	60	80	100
Engine Oil *1
	0W-20

*1: If mineral oil or semi-synthetic oil is used, it is a severe condition in terms of engine oil change.

An engine oil displaying this American Petroleum Institute(API) Certification Mark conforms to the International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). It is recommended to only use engine oils that uphold this API Certification Mark.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

Frame number OHCR086001

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover.

VIN label OHCM087005

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

Interior view of a car showing dashboard and seat components (no visible text or symbols)

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's side center pillar gives the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

Interior view of a car showing a mounted sensor or sensor device with no visible text or symbols on the device itself.

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your car.

ENGINE NUMBER

Smartstream G1.6 OYC086005

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

Eastern Region:

Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont. Eastern Region 1122 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg, NJ 08831 [phone]

Southern Region:

Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066

[phone]

South Central Region:

Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019

[phone]

Central Region:

Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181

[phone]

Western Region:

Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California, Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box 20850 Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850

[phone]

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov;

download the SaferCar mobile application;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,

West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

Index

Index

A

Accessing Your Vehicle 3-3

Immobilizer System....3-11

Remote Key....3-3

Smart Key....3-6

Air bag - Advanced supplemental restraint system......2-39

Additional Safety Precautions....2-61

Air Bag Warning Labels....2-61

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?......2-44

Occupant Classification System (OCS) 2-50

SRS Care 2-60

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates....2-49

Where Are the Air Bags? 2-41

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision?......2-55

Air cleaner....7-23

Filter Replacement 7-23

Air Conditioning System 8-5

Appearance care....7-72

Exterior Care 7-72

Interior Care 7-77

Audio (With Touch Screen) 4-9

Feature of Your Audio....4-10, 4-13

Media....4-22

Phone 4-34

Radio 4-18

Setup....4-42

SiriusXM Radio....4-21

Automatic Climate Control System....3-104

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning ....3-105

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning....3-106

System Maintenance....3-113

System Operation 3-111

B

Battery....7-28

Battery Recharging....7-29

For Best Battery Service 7-29

Reset Features 7-30

Before driving 5-3

Before Entering the Vehicle 5-3

Before Starting 5-3

Brake/clutch fluid 7-21

Checking the Brake/Clutch Fluid Level....7-21

Braking system 5-24

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)......5-27

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator....5-25

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)......5-28

Good Braking Practices....5-33

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)....5-32

Parking Brake....5-25

Power Brakes....5-24

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) 5-31

Bulb Wattage....8-3

C

California perchlorate notice 7-84

Child restraint system (CRS)....2-28

Children Always in the Rear 2-28

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ......2-31

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS)....2-29

Climate control air filter 7-24

Filter Inspection....7-24

Consumer Information 8-11

Cruise control (CC)....5-46

Cruise Control operation 5-46

D

Dimensions 8-2

Door Locks 3-12

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features....3-16

Child-Protector Rear Door Locks 3-16

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle....3-13

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle .....3-12

Drive mode integrated control system....5-34

Driver Assist System....3-94

Rear View Monitor....3-94

E

Emission control system 7-80

Crankcase Emission Control System 7-80

Evaporative Emission Control System Including Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) .....7-80

Exhaust Emission Control System....7-81

Engine 8-2

Engine Compartment....1-6, 7-3

Engine coolant 7-18

Changing Engine Coolant 7-20

Checking the Engine Coolant Level 7-18

Engine Number 8-10

Engine oil....7-16

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter 7-17

Checking the Engine Oil Level....7-16

Index

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items....7-13

Exterior Features....3-42

Fuel Filler Door....3-49

Hood 3-42

Smart Trunk....3-45

Trunk 3-43

Exterior Overview....1-2

F

Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)

- Radar Type 5-35

FCA Sensor 5-39

FCA Warning Message and System Control....5-37

Limitations of the System 5-42

System Malfunction 5-40

System Setting and Activation 5-35

Fuses 7-46

Fuse/Relay Panel Description 7-50

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement 7-47

H

Hazard Warning Flasher 6-2

|

If the Engine Overheats ....6-6

If the Engine Will Not Start....6-3

If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly ....6-3

If the Engine Turns Over Normally but Doesn't Start ....6-3

If You Have a Flat Tire 6-14

Changing Tires 6-15

Jack and Tools 6-14

Ignition switch 5-5

Engine Start/Stop Button....5-8

Key Ignition Switch 5-5

Important safety precautions....2-2

Air Bag Hazards....2-2

Always Wear Your Seat Belt....2-2

Control Your Speed 2-2

Driver Distraction....2-2

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition 2-2

Restrain All Children....2-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving 6-2

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing ......6-2

If the Engine Stalls While Driving....6-2

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving....6-3

Infotainment System 4-2

Antenna 4-2

AUX, USB and iPod® Port 4-2

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free......4-4

Features of Your Vehicle 4-7

How Vehicle Audio Works....4-5

Steering Wheel Audio Control 4-3

Instrument Cluster....3-52

Gauges and Meters....3-54

Instrument Cluster Control....3-53

LCD Display Messages....3-68

Transmission shift indicator 3-57

Warning and Indicator Lights....3-58

Instrument Panel Overview 1-5

Interior Features....3-123

Clock 3-127

Clothes Hanger....3-127

Cup Holder 3-123

Floor Mat Anchor(s)....3-128

Luggage Net Holder....3-128

Power Outlet....3-125

Sunvisor....3-124

Interior Overview....1-4

J

Jump Starting 6-4

L

LCD Display 3-72

LCD Display Control 3-72

LCD Display Modes 3-72

Light bulbs 7-61

Headlamp, Position lamp, Fog lamp, Daytime Running Light, Turn Signal Lamp and Side Marker....7-61

High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....7-70

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement....7-70

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement....7-67

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement 7-67

Lighting....3-85

Exterior Lights....3-85

Interior Lights....3-90

Welcome System 3-91

M

Maintenance services....7-4

Owner Maintenance Precautions....7-4

Owner's Responsibility....7-4

Manual Climate Control System 3-95

Heating and Air Conditioning 3-96

System Maintenance ....3-102

System Operation 3-100

Index

Manual transmission 5-15

Good Driving Practices ....5-17

Manual Transmission Operation 5-15

Mirrors 3-21

Inside Rearview Mirror 3-21

Side View Mirrors 3-29

0

Owner maintenance 7-5

Owner Maintenance Schedule....7-6

P

Parking brake 7-22

Checking the Parking Brake 7-22

R

Recommended Lubricants and Capacities....8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number....8-8

Reporting Safety Defects....8-12

S

Scheduled maintenance services....7-7

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions (Smartstream G1.6) 7-11

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Smartstream G1.6) ...7-8

Severe Driving Conditions....7-12

Seat belts 2-16

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions 2-24

Care of Seat Belts....2-27

Seat Belt Restraint System....2-18

Seat Belt Safety Precautions 2-16

Seat Belt Warning Light....2-17

Seats 2-3

Front Seats....2-5

Head Restraints....2-11

Rear Seats....2-8

Safety Precautions 2-4

Seat Warmers....2-14

Smartstream intelligent variable transmission

(Smartstream IVT)....5-18

Smartstream intelligent variable transmission

(Smartstream IVT) operation....5-18

Good driving practices 5-23

Special driving conditions 5-51

Driving at Night 5-52

Driving in Flooded Areas....5-53

Driving in the Rain....5-52

Hazardous Driving Conditions....5-51

Highway Driving....5-53

Rocking the Vehicle 5-51

Smooth Cornering 5-52

Steering Wheel....3-18

Electric Power Steering (EPS) 3-18

Heated steering wheel 3-20

Horn....3-20

Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering....3-19

Storage Compartment 3-120

Center Console Storage....3-120

Glove Box 3-121

Multi Box 3-122

Sliding Armrest 3-120

Sunglass Holder....3-121

Sunroof....3-37

Resetting the sunroof....3-39

Sliding the sunroof 3-38

Sunroof opening and closing....3-38

Sunshade....3-39

Tilting the sunroof 3-38

T

Theft-Alarm System 3-17

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 6-8

Changing a Tire with TPMS 6-12

Check Tire Pressure....6-8

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with

Position Indicator 6-10

Low Tire Pressure Telltale....6-10

Tire Pressure Monitoring System....6-9

TPMS Malfunction Indicator 6-11

Tire Specification and Pressure Label 8-10

Tires and wheels 7-31, 8-4

All Season Tires 7-43

Check Tire Inflation Pressure....7-33

Low Aspect Ratio Tires....7-44

Radial-Ply Tires....7-44

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures....7-32

Snow Tires....7-44

Summer Tires 7-43

Tire Care....7-31

Tire Maintenance....7-36

Tire Replacement....7-35

Tire Rotation....7-33

Tire Sidewall Labeling 7-36

Index

Tire Terminology and Definitions....7-40

Tire Traction 7-36

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 7-34

Wheel Replacement....7-36

Towing 6-21

Emergency Towing....6-23

Removable Towing Hook....6-22

Tie-down Hook....6-24

Towing Service....6-21

Trailer Towing....5-63

Trip Computer....3-77

Typc A 3-77

Type B 3-81

V

Vehicle Certification Label......8-9

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)......8-9

Vehicle load limit....5-58

Tire Loading Information Label....5-59

Volume and Weight....8-5

W

Washer fluid 7-22

Checking the Washer Fluid Level 7-22

Windows 3-33

Manual windows 3-36

Power Windows....3-33

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging 3-115

Auto Defogging System (Only for Automatic Climate Control System).....3-118

Rear Window Defroster....3-119

Winter driving....5-54

Snow or Icy Conditions....5-54

Winter Precautions 5-56

Wiper blades 7-26

Blade Inspection....7-26

Blade Replacement....7-26

Wipers and Washers....3-92

Windshield Washers 3-93

Windshield Wipers 3-92